JP6511420B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine played by a player.

  Some recent gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, have various effects to entertain the player. For example, there are many which suggest the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit by the display color of the title when performing the reach production, and those which suggest the reliability of the big hit by performing so-called chance up production during the reach production (For example, refer to nonpatent literature 1).

"Pachinko Success Guide", Guide Works, Inc. February 16, 2014 issue, February 16, 2014 issue, pages 4-11, CR Pachinko Hokuto's fist five hundred split

  As described above, currently, gaming machines are required not only to provide enjoyment to acquire gaming media (game machines, medals, etc.) but also to provide various values (for example, highly entertaining effects) There is. For this reason, the gaming machine is always required to have a new operation that can attract the interest of the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its main object is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a novel operation that attracts the interest of a player.

  In order to achieve the above object, one aspect of the present invention adopts the following configuration. Note that reference numerals in parentheses, descriptive texts, and the like indicate correspondence relationships with embodiments to be described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and in any case, do not limit the scope of one aspect of the present invention. Absent.

A gaming machine (1) according to the present invention is
Special game determination means (100) for determining whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) by establishment of the start condition;
Symbol display control means (100) for controlling a variable display for stopping the determination symbol indicating the determination result after changing the symbol in the symbol display means based on the determination result by the special game determination means;
Special game execution means for performing the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be performed;
Game state control means (100) capable of controlling the game in the normal game state and the advantageous game state (probable change game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state;
And effect control means (400, 500) for controlling a predetermined effect;
The effect control means is
When the variable display is performed by the symbol display control means in the normal gaming state, one of a plurality of specific effects (full version of theatrical effect; see FIGS. 67 and 68) and any of the specific effects It is possible to execute partial rendering (short version of theatrical rendering; see Fig. 67, Fig. 68) which is a part of
When the specific effect is executed, the first effect time (60 seconds) is executed,
When executing the partial effect, the second effect time (30 seconds) shorter than the first effect time is executed,
While being controlled in the advantageous gaming state, any of the plurality of specific effects can be executed for the first effect time according to the operation of the player on the operation means (see FIGS. 75 and 76).
The specific effect can be continued and executed even during a period in which the variable display in the advantageous gaming state is not performed (waiting customer status). (See Figure 75 and Figure 76)

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a novel operation that attracts the player's interest.

Schematic front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention The enlarged view which shows an example of the indicator 4 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 of FIG. A partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 1 Block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A figure for explaining an example of game ball passage judging processing peculiar to this embodiment Diagram for explaining an example of the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a big hit game according to the present embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a big hit game according to the present embodiment A schematic view showing an example of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 according to the present embodiment are installed An example of a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control unit 100 An example of a detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S911 in FIG. 10 An example of a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S 909 of FIG. 10 An example of a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main control unit 100 A diagram for describing data used when executing the special drawing game counting process and the drawing game counting process, and a storage area (working area) of the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100. An example of a conceptual diagram of the fluctuation time table used to set the time of the special symbol fluctuation display in the area 11A An example of a detailed flowchart of the starting opening switch process in step S2 of FIG. 13 An example of a detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. 13 An example of a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S408 of FIG. 17 Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table Diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern determination table An example of a detailed flowchart of the process during stop in step S414 of FIG. 17 An example of a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. 13 An example of a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. 13 An example of a detailed flowchart of the V area opening / closing process in step S612 in FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S625 in FIG. An example of a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 400 An example of a detailed flowchart showing an RTC effect control process in step S10 of FIG. 30 Diagram for explaining an example of phase update according to the present embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the game state which can perform RTC production concerning this embodiment An example of a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S11 of FIG. 30 An example of a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S11 of FIG. 30 An example of a detailed flowchart of the notification effect setting process in step S115 of FIG. 34 An example of a detailed flowchart of effect state setting processing in step S801 in FIG. 36 An example of a detailed flowchart of effect content determination processing in step S 803 of FIG. 36 An example of the sub lottery table referred to in step S8034 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing an RTC effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process in step S1050 in FIG. 40 An example of a detailed flowchart of the second RTC effect execution process in step S1080 of FIG. 40 An example of a flowchart showing an opening effect process performed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing a winning process performed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing ending effect processing executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing a round effect process performed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of effect selection processing in step S1245 of FIG. 46 An example of a flowchart showing a customer waiting process performed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of switching processing during waiting for a customer in step S719 in FIG. 48 An example of a flowchart showing an effect execution process performed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of non-interlocking effect execution processing in step S904 in FIG. 50 An example of a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation production execution process in step S906 in FIG. 50 An example of a detailed flowchart of selected play reach production execution processing in step S9062 in FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flowchart of partial theater reach production execution processing in step S9064 in FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flowchart of the evolution determination effect execution process in step S9066 of FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flowchart of the pseudo-series effect execution process in step S9068 of FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flowchart of post-accident variation production execution processing in step S9070 in FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flow chart of the process of performing probability variation variation effect execution processing in step S9072 of FIG. 52 An example of a detailed flowchart of the RTC compatible change presentation execution process in step S9074 in FIG. 52 A diagram for explaining an example of switching of selection effects according to the present embodiment A diagram for describing an example of a first RTC effect / replacement effect according to the present embodiment A diagram for describing an example of a first RTC effect / replacement effect according to the present embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a second RTC effect according to the present embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a second RTC effect according to the present embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a round effect concerning this embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a round effect concerning this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the choice play reach production and partial play reach production which concern on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the choice play reach production and partial play reach production which concern on this embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a development judgment effect according to the present embodiment A diagram for explaining an example of a development judgment effect according to the present embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a simulated rendition according to the present embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a simulated rendition according to the present embodiment A diagram for describing an example of a dedicated effect after a collision according to the present embodiment A diagram for describing an example of a dedicated effect after a collision according to the present embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a selection effect in the probability variation gaming state according to the present embodiment A figure for explaining an example of a selection effect in the probability variation gaming state according to the present embodiment

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. In the following, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be simply referred to as the gaming machine 1.

[Schematic Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, a schematic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view showing an example of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing an example of the display 4 provided in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a partial plan view of the gaming machine 1.

  In FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine configured to pay out a winning ball when, for example, a gaming ball hit by an operation of a player wins. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 on which gaming balls are punched out, and a frame member 5 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 5 is configured to be able to open and close with respect to the main part of the gaming machine 1 centering on a hinge provided on the pivotal support side. A lock 43 is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the frame member 5 (for example, an end opposite to the support side), and the frame member 5 is opened by unlocking the lock 43. It is possible to open

  In the front of the game board 2, a game area 20 for playing a game with a game ball is formed. In the game area 20, a rail member that forms a passage toward the upper position of the game area 20, with the game balls fired from below (the launcher 211; see FIG. 4) rising along the main surface of the game board 2 A guide member (not shown) for guiding the raised gaming ball to the right of the game area 20 is provided.

  Further, on the game board 2, an image display unit 6 for displaying images for various effects is disposed at a position where it is easy for the player to visually recognize. The image display unit 6 notifies the player of the result of the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) by displaying the decorative symbol, for example, according to the progress of the game by the player, or the appearance of a character, the appearance of an item, etc. The notice effect by is displayed, or the holding image indicating the number of times the special symbol lottery is held is displayed. Although the image display unit 6 is configured of a liquid crystal display device, an EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, or the like, any other display device may be used. Further, on the front of the game board 2, movable role objects 7 and board lamps 8 used for various effects are provided. The movable role object 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the gaming board 2, and performs effects by performing a predetermined operation according to the progress of the game or according to the operation of the player. Further, the board lamp 8 performs various effects by light by emitting light according to the progress of the game.

  In the game area 20, a game nail, a windmill (both not shown), and the like for changing the falling direction of the game ball are disposed. Further, in the game area 20, various prizes and prizes related to the lottery are disposed at predetermined positions. In addition, in FIG. 1, the 1st starting opening 21, the 2nd starting opening 22, the gate 25, the 1st big winning opening 23, the 2nd big winning opening 51, V area | region as an example of the various goods regarding a prize or a lottery. 53 and the normal winning opening 24 are disposed on the game board 2. Furthermore, in the game area 20, there is provided a discharge port 26 for discharging the game ball that did not win in any winning opening among the game balls hit in the game area 20 to the outside of the game area 20. .

  Each of the first start opening 21 and the second start opening 22 wins when a game ball enters, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is started. The first starting opening 21 is a predetermined special electric combination (first large winning opening 23, second large winning opening 51) and / or a predetermined special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator described later) It is a winning opening concerning winning of a game ball which will operate 4a). Further, the second starting opening 22 operates the above special electric combination and / or a predetermined special symbol indicator (second special symbol indicator 4b to be described later), a prize related to the game ball winning It is a mouth. When the game ball passes through the gate 25, the normal symbol lottery (the following opening and closing lottery of the electric tulip 27) is started. In addition, even if the game ball is won in the normal winning opening 24, the lottery does not start.

  The second starting opening 22 is provided on the right side of the first starting opening 21 and is provided with an electric tulip 27 in the vicinity of the entrance of the game ball as an example of a common electric combination. The electric tulip 27 has a pair of wing parts imitating a tulip flower, and the pair of wing parts opens and closes left and right by driving of an electric tulip opening and closing part 112 (for example, electric solenoid) described later. When the electric tulip 27 has the pair of wings closed (see FIG. 1), the opening width guided to the entrance of the second start opening 22 is extremely narrow, so the game ball does not enter the second start opening 22. It becomes a state. On the other hand, since the opening width guided to the entrance of the 2nd starting opening 22 will expand when a pair of blade parts open left and right (not shown), a game ball enters the 2nd starting opening 22 in the electric tulip 27 It becomes an easy open state. When the game ball passes through the gate 25 and the electric tulip 27 passes the gate 25 and wins the normal symbol lottery, the pair of wing parts opens for a specified time (for example, 0.10 seconds) and opens and closes for a specified number of times (for example, once) Do.

  The first large winning opening 23 is located below the second starting opening 22 and opens in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery. The first large winning opening 23 is normally in a closed state and is in a state where the game ball can not enter, but it protrudes from the main surface of the game board 2 according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and is opened and It becomes easy to enter the game ball. For example, the first big winning opening 23 repeats a round which is in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds has elapsed or 10 game balls have been won) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times).

  The second large winning opening 51 is located above the second starting opening 22 in the right area of the game area 20, and is opened in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery. The second big winning opening 51 is normally closed as shown by the solid line of the open / close member 50 (hereinafter referred to as the right hand) in the shape of a solid line and the game ball can not enter, but the special symbol lottery Depending on the result, the right hand 50 is opened as shown by the dotted line, and the game ball is in an easy-to-open state. For example, the second large winning opening 51 is opened until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds has elapsed or a condition for winning 10 gaming balls, or 0.1 seconds has elapsed or a condition for winning 10 gaming balls) is satisfied. A round of becoming a state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once).

  Inside the second large winning opening 51, as shown in FIG. 1, there is a space where the gaming balls that entered the second large winning opening 51 flow down, and in this space, the flow down path on the left and the flow down path on the right Is provided. A V region (region describing “V” in FIG. 1) 53 is provided in the right downflow path, and a V region opening / closing member (hereinafter referred to as “V”) is provided at a branch portion between the left downflow path and the right downflow path. Called "Hane" 52 is provided. The V-Hane 52 is normally in a closed state in which the flow-down path on the right side is closed as shown by a solid line, and the gaming balls flow only down the flow-down path on the left side. Then, the V-Hane 52 opens the flow-down path on the right and closes the flow-off path on the left as indicated by a dotted line after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the second winning opening 51 is opened. After the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 6 seconds), the state returns to the above-described closed state. That is, when the V-Hane 52 is in the closed state, the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening 51 does not flow down the flow-down path on the left and does not pass the V region 53, and when the V-Hane 52 is in the open state, the second The gaming ball having entered the special winning opening 51 flows down the rightward flow path and passes through the V area 53. Then, the gaming balls having entered the second big winning opening 51 are discharged to the outside of the gaming area 20 by entering the area 54 after having made the flowing path on the left side or the flowing path on the right side. In addition, the second large winning opening switch 117 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 51 (that is, the opening portion opened and closed by the right hand 50: see FIG. 1). It is detected that the second big winning opening 51 is won when the gaming ball enters the opening 51.

  Further, at the lower right of the game board 2, a display 4 for displaying the results of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery described above and the number of reservations is disposed. Details of the display 4 will be described later.

  Here, the payout balls will be described. When the game ball enters (makes a prize) in the first start opening 21, the second start opening 22, the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, and the normal winning opening 24, according to the place where the gaming ball has won A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out per game ball. For example, if one game ball is won in the first start opening 21 and the second start opening 22 and if one game ball is won in the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 51, then 13 winning balls When one gaming ball is won in the prize ball or the normal winning opening 24, ten prize balls are paid out respectively. In addition, even if it detects that a game ball passed the gate 25, there is no payout of the prize ball interlocked with it.

  A handle 31, a lever 32, a stop button 33, an eject button 34, a speaker 35, a frame lamp 36, an effect button 37, an effect key 38, a plate 39, etc. are provided on the frame member 5 which is the front of the gaming machine 1. There is.

  When the player touches the handle 31 and rotates the lever 32 in a clockwise direction, the shooting device 211 (for example, 100 pieces per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle See FIG. 4) to electrically launch the game ball. A tray 39 (see FIG. 3) is provided to project forward of the gaming machine 1 and temporarily holds gaming balls supplied to the launch device 211. Further, the above-mentioned winning balls are paid out to the plate 39. Then, the gaming balls stored in the tray 39 are supplied to the launching device 211 one by one by the feeding device (not shown) at a timing interlocked with the operation by the player's lever 32.

  Even if the stop button 33 is provided on the lower side of the handle 31 and the player touches the handle 31 to rotate the lever 32 clockwise, the game ball is fired by being pressed by the player. Temporarily stop The eject button 34 is provided on the front surface near the position where the plate 39 is provided, and when pressed by the player, drops the gaming balls accumulated on the plate 39 into a box (not shown).

  The speaker 35 and the frame lamp 36 notify the gaming state and the situation of the gaming machine 1 and perform various effects. The speaker 35 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. In addition, the frame lamp 36 performs various effects by light according to the pattern by lighting / flickering, the difference in light emission color, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the display 4 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. In FIG. 2, the display 4 is a first special symbol display 4a, a second special symbol display 4b, a first special symbol hold indicator 4c, a second special symbol hold indicator 4d, a normal symbol indicator 4e, an ordinary A symbol hold indicator 4f and a gaming state indicator 4g are provided.

  In the first special symbol display 4a, the display symbol is changed and displayed in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 21. For example, the first special symbol display 4a is constituted by a 7-segment display device, and when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 21, the special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the second special symbol display 4 b is displayed with the display symbol fluctuating in response to the game ball winning in the second starting opening 22. For example, similarly, the second special symbol display 4b is also constituted by a 7-segment display device, and when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 22, the special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the lottery result is displayed. Do. In the normal symbol display 4e, in response to the game ball passing through the gate 25, the display symbol fluctuates and is displayed. For example, the normal symbol display 4e is formed of an LED display device, and when the game ball passes the gate 25, the normal symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the lottery result is displayed.

  The first special symbol hold display 4c displays the number of times the special symbol lottery is held when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 21. The second special symbol hold display 4d displays the number of times the special symbol lottery is held when the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 22. The normal symbol hold display 4f displays the number of times the normal symbol lottery is held. For example, the first special symbol hold indicator 4c, the second special symbol hold indicator 4d, and the normal symbol hold indicator 4f are respectively configured by LED display devices provided in a row, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the lighting mode Ru.

  The gaming state indicator 4g displays a gaming state (such as a time saving state) at the time of power on of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3, an input device provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. In FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an effect button 37 and an effect key 38 as an example of the input device.

  The effect button 37 and the effect key 38 are provided for the player to input an effect. The effect button 37 is provided on the upper surface side of the plate 39 protruding forward of the gaming machine 1. The effect key 38 has a center key and four direction keys arranged in a substantially cross, and is provided adjacent to the effect button 37 on the upper surface side of the plate 39. When the effect button 37 and the effect key 38 are respectively pressed by the player, predetermined effects are performed. For example, the player can enjoy a predetermined effect by pressing the effect button 37 at a predetermined timing. In addition, the player can select one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 6 by operating the four direction keys of the effect key 38 or the like. Also, the player can input the selected image as information by operating the central key of the effect key 38.

  Further, on the back side of the gaming machine 1, a ball tank for storing gaming balls for payout and a payout device (payout drive unit 311) for dispensing the gaming balls onto the plate 39 are provided, and various substrates and the like are attached. ing. For example, on the rear surface of the game board 2, a main board, a sub board, and the like are disposed. Specifically, on the main board, there is disposed a main control board having a main control unit 100 (see FIG. 4) for performing internal lottery and determination of winning. The sub board includes a launch control board configured with a launch control unit 200 (see FIG. 4) that controls a launch device 211 that launches game balls to the upper part of the gaming area 20, and a payout control unit 300 that controls the payout of prize balls. A payout control board having the above configuration, a presentation control board having the presentation control unit 400 for controlling the presentation in an integrated manner, an image control board having the image sound control unit 500 for controlling the presentation with images and sounds, and A lamp control board or the like is provided in which a lamp control unit 600 configured to control effects by the lamps (frame lamp 36 and panel lamp 8) and the movable part 7 is configured. In addition, on the rear surface of the game board 2, the power on / off of the gaming machine 1 is switched, and the 24 V (volt) AC power supplied to the gaming machine 1 is converted to DC power of various voltages. A switching power supply is provided for outputting the DC power of the circuit to the various substrates described above.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a control device for performing operation control and signal processing in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1.

  In FIG. 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control unit 100, a launch control unit 200, a payout control unit 300, an effect control unit 400, an image and sound control unit 500, a lamp control unit 600, and the like.

  The main control unit 100 includes a central processing unit (CPU) 101, a read only memory (ROM) 102, and a random access memory (RAM) 103. The CPU 101 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the number of prize balls, such as internal lottery and determination of winning. The ROM 102 stores programs executed by the CPU 101, various data, and the like. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory or the like of the CPU 101. Hereinafter, main functions of the main control unit 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 100 performs special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22, and effects control of determination result data indicating whether or not the special symbol drawing is won. Send to section 400.

  The main control unit 100 controls the open time when the blade of the electric tulip 27 is in the open state, the number of times the blade opens and closes, and the open / close time interval when the blade opens and closes. The main control unit 100 also holds the number of execution suspension of special symbol lottery when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21, the number of execution suspension of special symbol lottery when the gaming ball runs the second starting opening 22, And the number of execution holding times of the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes the gate 25 is respectively managed, and data related to these holding times are sent to the effect control unit 400.

  Main control unit 100 controls the opening / closing operation of first large winning opening 23 and second large winning opening 51 in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, until the main control unit 100 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or ten game balls have been won), the first big winning opening 23 is projected and inclined for a predetermined number of rounds to be open For example, it is controlled to repeat only 16 times). Further, for example, until the main control unit 100 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a condition of 29.5 seconds or winning of ten gaming balls, or a condition of winning of 0.1 seconds or winning of ten gaming balls), Control is performed so that the round in which the second large winning opening 51 is in an open state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Further, the main control unit 100 controls an opening / closing time interval (interval time) at which the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51 are opened and closed.

  The main control unit 100 controls the posture of the V-shaped handle 52 provided inside the second big winning opening 51 to control the open state and the closed state of the V area 53 (see FIG. 1). Further, the main control unit 100 detects that the gaming ball has passed through the V area 53.

  The main control unit 100 changes the gaming state according to the progress of the game, and according to the progress of the game, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, the execution interval of the special symbol lottery (the special symbol changes display on the indicator 4) To change the open / close operation of the electric tulip 27 or the like.

  When the game ball wins in the first start opening 21, the second start opening 22, the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, and the normal winning opening 24, the main control unit 100 is in a place where the gaming balls have won In response, it instructs the payout control unit 300 to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls per one game ball. Note that, even if it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 25, the main control unit 100 does not instruct the payout control unit 300 to pay out the winning balls linked thereto. When the payout control unit 300 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the main control unit 100, information on the number of the prize balls paid out from the payout control unit 300 is sent to the main control unit 100. Then, based on the information acquired from the payout control unit 300, the main control unit 100 manages the number of prize balls paid out.

  In order to realize the functions described above, the main control unit 100 includes a first start opening switch 111a, a second start opening switch 111b, an electric tulip open / close unit 112, a gate switch 113, a first big winning opening switch 114, a first Large winning opening opening and closing unit 115, second large winning opening switch 117, second large winning opening opening and closing unit 118, V area switch 119, V area opening and closing unit 120, normal winning opening switch 116, display 4 (first special symbol display 4a, the second special symbol display 4b, the first special symbol hold indicator 4c, the second special symbol hold indicator 4d, the normal symbol indicator 4e, the normal symbol hold indicator 4f, and the gaming state indicator 4g) It is connected.

  The first starting opening switch 111 a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball having won the first starting opening 21. The second starting opening switch 111 b sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball having won the second starting opening 22. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 112 opens / closes the pair of wing portions of the electric tulip 27 according to the control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The gate switch 113 sends to the main control unit 100 a signal corresponding to the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 25. The first large winning opening switch 114 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 according to the game ball having won the first large winning opening 23. The first large winning opening opening / closing unit 115 opens / closes the first large winning opening 23 in accordance with the control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The second large winning opening switch 117 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 according to the game ball having won the second large winning opening 51. The second large winning opening opening and closing unit 118 changes the posture of the right hand 50 according to the control signal sent from the main control unit 100 to open and close the second large winning opening 51. The V area switch 119 sends a signal corresponding to the game ball having passed through the V area 53 to the main control unit 100. The V-region switching unit 120 changes the posture of the V-shaped handle 52 according to the control signal sent from the main control unit 100 to open and close the flow-down path to the V-region 53. The normal winning opening switch 116 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball having won the normal winning opening 24.

[About switch processing of this embodiment]
In the following, the switch processing (game ball passage determination processing) of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In this game ball passing determination process, the game ball enters the above-mentioned first start opening 21, second start opening 22, gate 25, first big winning opening 23, second big winning opening 51, V area 53, etc. The present invention is not limited to the case where it is determined that a ball (or has passed), but, for example, the case where the payout control unit 300 determines (counts) the awarded balls (the number of winning balls) paid out.

  FIG. 5 shows an example of an output signal of the proximity switch installed as the first start opening switch 111a etc. for detecting the game ball winning (pass) to the above-mentioned first start opening 21 etc., and this output signal It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the binarization signal binarized into ON level and OFF level using the passage determination threshold value (5V). The proximity switch has, as one example, a circular through hole through which the game ball passes on a rectangular plate, and an output signal of a voltage corresponding to a change in magnetic flux when the game ball passes through the through hole It is a DC two-wire electronic switch that outputs. As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 5, the voltage level of the output signal of the proximity switch drops as the gaming ball approaches the center of the through hole, and becomes minimum (minimal) around the center of the gaming ball reaching the center of the through hole. , The game ball rises as it passes by the center of the through hole and leaves. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the output signal of the proximity switch is converted by the comparator (not shown) to the OFF level of the binarized signal when the voltage level is larger than the passage determination threshold (5 V). When it is below the passage determination threshold (5 V), it is converted to the ON level of the binarized signal. In the example of FIG. 5, the passage determination threshold used for determination is described as one passage determination threshold (5 V). For example, when switching from the OFF level to the ON level, the first passage determination threshold (5 V) is used. On the other hand, the second passage determination threshold (6 V) may be used when switching from the ON level to the OFF level. As a result, it is possible to prevent the binary signal from being inappropriately switched between ON / OFF when the output signal of the proximity switch rises and falls over the passage determination threshold due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Then, as a part of each process in the timer interrupt process executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds (4 ms) by the main control unit 100 described later with reference to FIG. 10, the binarized signal shown in FIG. By determining ON / OFF, passage determination of the game ball is performed. The details will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 5, it is determined (ON / OFF determination) at intervals of 4 milliseconds whether the binarized signal is the ON level or the OFF level. In FIG. 5, the order of ON / OFF determination is represented using the natural number n. Further, in FIG. 5, the OFF level is determined by the n-2nd to n-th ON / OFF determinations, and then the ON level is determined by the n + 1-th ON / OFF determination. Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be the ON level, in the processing of the ON / OFF determination that is determined to be the ON level, a predetermined minute time (for example, 4 microseconds) shorter than the 4 millisecond interval is The second ON / OFF determination is executed at the elapsed timing. In FIG. 5, the ON / OFF determination in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process is determined to be the ON level both twice. After that, the OFF level is determined by the n + 2th to n + 4th ON / OFF determinations. Note that the ON level period (referred to as the ON period) of the binarization signal is longer than in the case of FIG. 5 (that is, the gaming ball passes at a slower speed than in the case of FIG. 5) If the determination is also performed in the ON period, two determinations are also performed in the (n + 2) th ON / OFF determination.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, when the n-th ON / OFF determination determines the OFF level and the n + 1-th ON / OFF determination determines the ON level twice, the through-hole of the proximity switch It is determined that one game ball has passed. These ON / OFF determinations are performed by, for example, the main control unit 100 (more precisely, the CPU 101) for the proximity switch installed as the first start port switch 111a, and connected to, for example, the payout control unit 300. The payout control unit 300 (more precisely, the CPU 301) executes the proximity switch for detecting the number of payouts of the played game balls (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the above-mentioned predetermined minute time (for example, 4 microseconds) in the n + 1th ON / OFF determination shown in FIG. 5 is preset by the programming content of software for executing the arithmetic processing of the game ball passage determination. Ru. That is, the predetermined minute time described above is a variable time that can be set to an arbitrary time by this programming content. In the gaming machine 1, noise of a fine cycle (for example, noise of a 3 to 15 microsecond cycle) may occur, and the cycle of the noise depends to some extent on the type of the gaming machine. For example, noise of a 5-microsecond cycle is likely to occur in a certain type of gaming machine, and noise of a 9-microsecond cycle is likely to occur in a certain type of gaming machine. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the predetermined minute time described above to an arbitrary time according to the content of programming, it is possible to effectively avoid erroneous determination due to noise of a minute cycle. Note that the above-described arithmetic processing for providing a predetermined minute time is a process that is not related to the progression of a game, and is a process only for earning time. For example, by repeating the process requiring 1 microsecond time four times, 4 microsecond can be provided as software as the above-mentioned predetermined micro time.

  By the way, in the recent gaming machines, the load of arithmetic processing increases due to the increase in the contents of arithmetic processing, so the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing, which was 2 milliseconds in the previous gaming machines, is extended to 4 milliseconds. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the ON / OFF determination using the proximity switch is also extended from the 2 millisecond interval and executed at 4 millisecond intervals.

  Here, the previous gaming machine was determined to be the OFF level in the n-th ON / OFF determination, determined to be the ON level in the n + 1-th ON / OFF determination, and determined to be the ON level in the n + 2-th ON / OFF determination. It was determined that one game ball had passed (hereinafter referred to as "previous determination method"). That is, the game ball passage is determined by three ON / OFF determinations by three timer interrupt processes. The reason that the ON level is determined at the (n + 1) th and the (n + 2) th times is to avoid an erroneous determination that the gaming ball has passed by being determined to be an ON level by chance due to noise. However, in recent gaming machines in which the ON / OFF determination interval is extended to 4 millisecond intervals, the above-described previous determination method can not determine the passage of gaming balls passing at a high speed. For example, it is difficult to determine the passage of gaming balls passing at a high speed as the ON level period (ON period) of the binarized signal as shown in FIG. 5 becomes very short (for example, around 7 milliseconds) It becomes. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that one gaming ball has passed by the determination method described using FIG. 5. From this, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably determine the game ball passage while preventing an erroneous determination due to noise by the ON / OFF determination by the two timer interrupt processes.

  The gaming machine 1 includes a power supply monitoring circuit for detecting that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted, a disconnection detection circuit for detecting that the wiring of the proximity switch is disconnected, and a proximity switch. An abnormality detection circuit (all not shown) such as a short circuit detection circuit for detecting that the wiring is shorted is provided. These abnormality detection circuits are disconnected, turned off, or short-circuited by providing a threshold (abnormality determination level) for determining abnormality occurrence at a voltage level higher than the passage determination threshold (5 V) shown in FIG. 5. Thus, when the voltage of the output signal of the proximity switch is lowered, the abnormality is judged before the voltage of the output signal is lowered to the passage judgment threshold to prevent erroneous judgment that the gaming ball has passed. As described above, since the abnormality determination level is provided at a voltage level higher than the passage determination threshold, it is difficult to increase the ON period by setting the passage determination threshold to a high value (for example, 10 V) (see FIG. 5). ). As a result, in the gaming machine 1, it is not realistic to determine the passage of the game ball by taking the ON period of the output signal long and using the above-described determination method.

In the switch processing described above, the second ON / OFF determination may not be performed in the timer interrupt processing in which the ON determination is executed after the timer interrupt processing in which the ON determination is performed.
In addition, in the switch processing described above, the passage of the gaming ball may be determined by detecting a point at which the binarization signal switches from ON to OFF. That is, in FIG. 5, it may be determined that one gaming ball has passed by having been determined ON twice in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing and OFF determination in the n + 2th timer interrupt processing.
In the switch processing described above, ON / OFF determination may be performed three or more times in one timer interrupt processing (ON detection), and in one timer interrupt processing (OFF detection), The ON / OFF determination may be performed twice or more.
In the switch processing described above, the game ball passage determination may be performed without converting the output signal (analog signal) of the proximity switch into a binarized signal (digital signal). That is, the game ball passage determination may be performed by determining whether or not the output signal (analog signal) of the proximity switch is less than the passage determination threshold (5 V).
Further, in the switch processing described above, the output signal of the proximity switch is an output signal which is at a low voltage level when the gaming ball is not detected and which is at a high voltage level when the gaming ball is detected. Thus, the output signal may be inverted and converted into a signal as shown by a dotted line in FIG.
Further, in the switch processing described above, the proximity switch itself may be configured to convert an analog signal into a binarized signal and output the binarized signal from the proximity switch.

  This is the end of the description of the switch process (game ball passage determination process) of the present embodiment, and the description returns to FIG. 4.

  In addition, the main control unit 100 sets the first special symbol display 4a to the result of the special symbol lottery (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first special symbol lottery) started by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21. indicate. Main control unit 100 causes second special symbol display 4b to display the result of the special symbol lottery (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second special symbol lottery) started by winning of the game ball to second starting opening 22. . The main control unit 100 displays the number of holding times holding the first special symbol lottery on the first special symbol holding display 4c. Main control unit 100 causes second special symbol hold display 4d to display the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been held. The main control unit 100 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery started by the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 on the normal symbol display 4e. The main control unit 100 displays the number of times the normal symbol lottery is suspended on the normal symbol suspension display 4f. The main control unit 100 also displays the gaming state at that time on the gaming state indicator 4g when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  The launch control unit 200 includes a CPU 201, a ROM 202, and a RAM 203. The CPU 201 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the launcher 211. The ROM 202 stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, and the like. The RAM 203 is used as a working memory or the like of the CPU 201.

  When the lever 32 is in the neutral position, the lever 32 is in the firing stop state without outputting a signal. Then, when the player rotates the lever 32 in the clockwise direction, the lever 32 outputs a signal corresponding to the rotation angle to the launch control unit 200 as a striking launch signal. The launch control unit 200 controls the launch operation of the launch device 211 based on the hit shot launch command signal. For example, the launch control unit 200 controls the operation of the launch device 211 such that the speed at which the gaming ball is launched increases as the rotation angle of the lever 32 increases. When the signal indicating that the stop button 33 is pressed is output, the launch control unit 200 stops the operation of the launch device 211 to launch the game ball.

  The payout control unit 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The CPU 301 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of the payout balls. The ROM 302 stores programs executed by the CPU 301, various data, and the like. The RAM 303 is used as a working memory or the like of the CPU 301.

  The payout control unit 300 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the main control unit 100. Specifically, the payout control unit 300 acquires, from the main control unit 100, a command to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls according to the place where the gaming ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 311 is controlled to pay out the number of winning balls specified in the command. Here, the payout drive unit 311 is configured by a drive motor or the like that sends out the game balls from the storage unit (ball tank) of the game balls.

  The effect control unit 400 includes a CPU 401, a ROM 402, a RAM 403, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 404. Further, the effect control unit 400 is connected to the effect key 38 operated by the player, and the effect control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the effect key 38 according to the operation of the effect key 38 by the player. Do. Further, the effect control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the effect button 37 via the lamp control unit 600. The CPU 401 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an effect. The ROM 402 stores programs executed by the CPU 401, various data, and the like. The RAM 403 is used as a working memory or the like of the CPU 401. The RTC 404 measures the current date and time.

  The effect control unit 400 sets effect contents based on data indicating the special symbol lottery result and the like sent from the main control unit 100. In addition, when the player presses the effect button 37 or the effect key 38, the effect control unit 400 may set the contents of the effect according to the operation input or the detection result.

  The image sound control unit 500 includes a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, and a non-volatile RAM 504. The CPU 501 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image and sound representing the contents of the effect. The ROM 502 stores programs executed by the CPU 501, various data, and the like. The RAM 503 is used as a working memory or the like of the CPU 501. The non-volatile RAM 504 is a non-volatile memory that holds the stored contents even when the power supply from the gaming machine 1 is interrupted, and is used as a memory that stores the identification number of the gaming machine and the like in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the image sound control unit 500 includes the non-volatile RAM 504, but the effect control unit 400 may include the non-volatile RAM 504. In the above description, although the nonvolatile RAM 504 is literally a nonvolatile memory, it does not ask whether the nonvolatile memory is substantially nonvolatile or not, and the built-in battery even if the power supply from the gaming machine 1 is shut off As long as the memory contents are held by having the

  The image sound control unit 500 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 6 and the sound output from the speaker 35 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Specifically, in the ROM 502 of the image sound control unit 500, a decorative symbol image for notifying a special symbol lottery result, an image such as a character or an item for displaying a notice effect or a prefetch notice effect, a special symbol lottery Image data for displaying on the image display unit 6 a suspension image indicating that the image is suspended and various background images and the like. Further, in the ROM 502 of the image sound control unit 500, various sound data such as music and sound to be output from the speaker 35 are synchronized with the image displayed on the image display unit 6 or independently of the displayed image. It is memorized. The CPU 501 of the image / sound control unit 500 selects and reads out the image data and sound data stored in the ROM 502 that correspond to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Then, the CPU 501 performs image processing for background image display, decorative symbol image display, character / item display and the like using the read image data, and various types corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Display effects. Then, the CPU 501 displays an image indicated by the image data subjected to the image processing on the image display unit 6. Further, the CPU 501 performs audio processing using the read acoustic data, and outputs a sound indicated by the audio data subjected to the audio processing from the speaker 35.

  The lamp control unit 600 includes a CPU 601, a ROM 602, and a RAM 603. The CPU 601 performs light emission of the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 and arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the movable part 7. The ROM 602 stores programs executed by the CPU 601, various data, and the like. The RAM 603 is used as a working memory or the like of the CPU 601.

  The lamp control unit 600 controls lighting / flickering of the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36, an emission color, and the like based on a command sent from the effect control unit 400. Further, the lamp control unit 600 controls the operation of the movable service 7 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Specifically, in the ROM 602 of the lamp control unit 600, lighting / flashing pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data with the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 according to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 400) Is stored. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 602 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Then, the CPU 601 controls the light emission of the board lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 based on the read light emission pattern data. Further, the ROM 602 stores operation pattern data of the movable service 7 according to the contents of the effect set by the effect control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 602 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Then, the CPU 601 controls the operation of the movable part 7 based on the read operation pattern data.

  In addition, the effect button 37 operated by the player is connected to the lamp control unit 600, and the lamp control unit 600 acquires operation data output from the effect button 37 in accordance with the operation of the effect button 37 by the player. Then, the operation data is transmitted to the effect control unit 400.

  The effect control unit 400 transmits the effect button 37 to the image sound control unit 500 based on the operation data of the effect button 37 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 and the operation data output from the effect key 38. The operation state of the effect key 38 is notified. Here, with regard to the operation state of the effect button 37 and the effect key 38, whether or not the operation is being performed, and what kind of operation is being performed (for example, long depression of the effect button 37, the effect key 38 left It is information including pressing of the direction key) and the like. Therefore, for example, when the effect button 37 is operated by the player, the operation state of the effect button 37 detected by the lamp control unit 600 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 500 via the effect control unit 400. Therefore, the image sound control unit 500 can also change the contents of the effect based on the operation state of the effect button 37 transmitted from the effect control unit 400.

[Summary of gaming state in this embodiment]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 includes at least a high probability state, a low probability state, a power support state, a non power support state, a short time state, a non short time state, and a big hit gaming state. The low probability state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a normal low probability (for example, 1/400), and the high probability state is a winning probability of the special symbol lottery being lower than the low probability state. The game state is set to a high probability (for example, 1/100). In the non-electric support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a normal low probability (for example, 1/10), and the electric tulip 27 can be in a short time (for example, 0.10 seconds) even when the normal symbol lottery is won. It is a gaming state in which the opening control is performed only once, and therefore, it is a gaming state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second starting opening 22. In the electric support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the non-electric support state (for example, 10/10), and the electric tulip 27 has a long time (for example, 2.00 seconds) when the normal symbol lottery is won. The gaming state is controlled to be opened 3 times), and therefore, the electric tulip 27 is frequently opened for a long time, and the gaming ball is easily entered into the second starting opening 22 frequently (winning) It is a gaming state. The non-time-saving state is a gaming state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is a predetermined time, and the time-saving state is a gaming state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is shorter than the non-time-shorting state. The jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a jackpot game is executed in which the first large winning opening 23 and the like are opened by winning the special symbol lottery (in a jackpot). In the present embodiment, the power support state and the time saving state are simultaneously controlled, but in this gaming state, the game ball is almost won by the game ball becoming easy to win at the second starting opening 22. It will be possible to execute many special symbol lotterys in a short time without decreasing. Also, in the following, the gaming state controlled to the low probability state, the non-power support state and the non-short time state is referred to as the normal gaming state, and the gaming state controlled to the high probability state, the power support state and the time saving state is the probability change gaming state It is said that the low certainty state, the electric support state and the short time state are the short time gaming state. In the present embodiment, a latent gaming state is not provided, which is a gaming state controlled to the high certainty state, the non-power support state, and the non-short time state.

[Summary of the big hit game in this embodiment]
Next, the outline of the big hit game of the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment. (1) of FIG. 6 shows the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery by the game ball winning at the first starting opening 21, and (2) of FIG. 6 shows the special symbol lottery by gaming ball winning at the second starting opening 22. Shows the big hit breakdown of As shown in (1) of FIG. 6, the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery due to the game ball winning at the first starting hole 21 is that the jackpot probability of jackpot A is 50% and the jackpot probability of jackpot B is 25% There is a jackpot C winning probability of 25%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6 (2), the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery by the game ball winning at the second starting opening 22 is that the winning probability of the big hit D is 50% and the winning probability of the big hit A is 25 %, And the winning probability of the jackpot B is 25%. Below, with reference to (3) of FIG. 6, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the big hit game at the time of winning each big hit AD is demonstrated.

  FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams for explaining an example of the big hit game when the big hit A to D according to the present embodiment is won, and the first in the big hit game executed when each big hit is won. The opening timing and closing timing of the big winning opening 23, the second big winning opening 51, and the V area 53 are shown.

  First, with reference to (1) of FIG. 7, a big hit game when winning a big hit A will be described. When the big hit game starts, the first large winning opening 23 is changed from the closed state to the open state after the passage of a predetermined opening time, and the first round game (which may be simply described as "R" hereinafter) It is started. In the 1R round game, when 10 game balls are won in the first large winning opening 23 or the opening time elapses 29.5 seconds, the first large winning opening 23 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the first R open The round game is ended. After that, after an interval period (for example, 2 seconds) between the rounds is provided, the first large winning opening 23 is opened in the same manner as the first R, and then the second round game is started, and the first large The winning opening 23 is closed, and the second round game ends. After that, similarly, round games of the third to seventh eyes are executed by opening and closing the first large winning opening 23 with an interval period (two seconds) interposed therebetween. Then, after the end of the 7th round game, after the interval period (for example, 5 seconds longer than the previous 2 seconds) is provided, the second big winning opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R The round game of the 8th R is started. In the round game of the 8Rs, when 10 game balls win in the second big winning opening 51 or the opening time passes 29.5 seconds, the second big winning opening 51 is closed from the open state, and the 8Rs are closed The round game is ended. Thereafter, when the predetermined ending time has passed, the big hit game is ended. Here, the V region 53 is changed from the closed state to the open state three seconds after the second large winning opening 51 is opened (after the eighth round game is started), and a predetermined time (for example, eight seconds) ) Is released. From this, in the 8R-th round game of the big hit game, it becomes possible for one or more gaming balls having entered the second big winning opening 51 to pass through the V area 53. Then, on the condition that the game ball passes the V area 53, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the high certainty state, more specifically, from the end of the big hit game to the next winning of the special symbol lottery (More accurately, until the special symbol lottery is performed 9999 times) will be controlled to the probability variation gaming state for a while. If no game ball passes in V area 53 for the reason that the game ball is not hit out in the eighth round game, the game state after the big hit is controlled to the low certainty state. Ru. However, in such a case, the game is controlled to the short time game state for 100 revolutions after the big hit game is over (that is, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and then to the normal game state. It will be done.

  Next, with reference to (2) of FIG. 7, a big hit game when winning a big hit B will be described. When the big hit game starts, as with the big hit game when winning a big hit A, the round games of the 1Rth to 7Rth eyes are started after the passage of a predetermined opening time. Then, after the end of the 7th round game, after the interval period (for example, 2 seconds same as the previous 2 seconds) is provided, the second big winning opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R A certain 8R-th round game is started. However, the 8Rth round game in the big hit game when the big hit B is won is different from the 8R round game in the big hit game when the big hit A is won. Specifically, in the 8Rth round game in the big hit game when winning a big hit B, the second big winning opening 51 is closed from the open state when the open time is 0.1 seconds, the eighth R Round game is finished. That is, in the 8R-th round game of the jackpot game when winning a jackpot B, the second jackpot 51 is opened momentarily, from this, the game ball hardly enters the second jackpot 51 . Thereafter, when the predetermined ending time has passed, the big hit game is ended. Here, the V area 53 is closed three seconds after the second large winning opening 51 is opened (the eighth round game is started), as in the big hit game when winning a big hit A. The state is opened and opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). That is, in the big hit game when winning a big hit B, the V area 53 is opened 2.9 seconds after the second big winning opening 51 is closed. In addition, even if the game ball enters the second large winning opening 51 within the opening time of 0.1 second from the structure of the second large winning opening 51, the gaming ball is inserted in the second large winning opening 51 in 2. It is usually impossible to stay for 9 seconds, so that the game ball can not normally pass the V area 53. And since the game ball does not pass V area 53, the game state after the big hit is controlled to the low certainty state, more specifically, it is in the short time game state from the end of the big hit game to the end of 100 rotations. It will be controlled and it will be controlled by a normal game state after that.

  Next, with reference to (1) of FIG. 8, the jackpot game when the jackpot C is won will be described. When the big hit game starts, the first large winning opening 23 is opened from the closed state after a predetermined opening time, and the first large winning opening 23 is opened when a very short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) elapses. The round to be closed from the step is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, seven times (7R)) across the interval period (for example, two seconds). Then, after the end of the 7th round game, after the interval period (for example, 2 seconds same as the previous 2 seconds) is provided, the second big winning opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R A certain 8R-th round game is started. In this 8R-round game, the second big winning opening 51 is opened momentarily (the open time is 0.1 seconds), as in the 8R-round game in the big hit game when winning a big hit B. Because the game ball hardly enters the second large winning opening 51, after that, when the predetermined ending time elapses, the big hit game ends. That is, since the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51 are opened only momentarily while the big hit game when winning the big hit C is being executed, the player can In the meantime, you can not get a prize ball substantially. Also, the V area 53 is opened 2.9 seconds after the second large winning opening 51 is closed, as in the big hit game when winning a big hit B, so the V area 53 is played. The ball never passes. For this reason, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the low certainty state, and more specifically, it is controlled to the short time gaming state from the end of the big hit game to the end of the 30 rotations, and thereafter controlled to the normal gaming state The Rukoto.

  Next, with reference to (2) of FIG. 8, a big hit game when winning a big hit D will be described. When the big hit game starts, as with the big hit game when winning a big hit A, after the predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round games of the 1R to 8R eyes are started. Then, the V region 53 is opened from the closed state three seconds after the eighth round game is started and opened for a predetermined time (for example, eight seconds), so in the eighth round game of the big hit game, It becomes possible for one or more gaming balls having entered the second big winning opening 51 to pass through the V area 53. When the 8Rth round game is over, the 9R to 16Rth round game is executed by opening and closing the first large winning opening 23 across the interval period (2 seconds), and thereafter, when a predetermined ending time passes, the big hit The game is over. Then, on the condition that the game ball passes the V area 53, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the high certainty state, more specifically, from the end of the big hit game to the next winning of the special symbol lottery (More accurately, until the special symbol lottery is performed 9999 times) will be controlled to the probability variation gaming state for a while. If no game ball passes in V area 53 for the reason that the game ball is not hit out in the eighth round game, the game state after the big hit is controlled to the low certainty state. Ru. However, in such a case, the game is controlled to the short time game state from the end of the big hit game to the end of the 100 rotations, and then is controlled to the normal game state.

  In the following, in the big hit game when winning a big hit B or big hit C, the second big winning opening 51 is opened momentarily (short open) and the game ball can not pass the V area 53 8R eyes A round game is called V short round game, and in the big hit game when winning a big hit A or a big hit D, the second big winning opening 51 is open (long open) for a longer time than the short open. The eighth round game in which the ball can pass through the V area 53 is referred to as a V long round game. Also, in the following, the game ball passing through the V region 53 is referred to as a V winning, and the round in which the above-described V long round game is performed may be referred to simply as a V round. Also, in the above, the V long round game and the V short round game are to be executed as the eighth round game in the big hit game, but it is not limited to this and it is executed as any round game The game may be performed, or may be executed as a plurality of round games without being limited to one round game.

  As described above, as shown in (3) of FIG. 6, in the big hit A, a total of eight round games including V-long round games are executed as round games capable of acquiring a prize ball, and a V-long round game Since the game ball can pass through the V area 53, after the big hit game, the game is controlled in the probability change gaming state until the next special symbol lottery is won in principle. In the big hit B, a total of eight round games including V short round game are executed, but in the V short round game, the game ball hardly enters the second big winning opening 51, so it is possible to obtain a prize ball As a substantial round game, a total of seven (7R) round games except V short round games are executed, and since the game ball can not pass through the V area 53 during V short round games, a big hit game After that, it is controlled in the time-saving game state up to 100 revolutions. In the big hit C, since seven round games and V short round games are executed in which the first big winning opening 23 is opened for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second), a substantial round capable of winning a winning ball There is no game (substantially 0R), and since the game ball can not pass through the V area 53 during the V short round game, after the big hit game, it is controlled in the time-saving game state up to 30 revolutions. In the big hit D, a total of 16 round games including a V long round game are executed as a round game capable of obtaining a winning ball, and the game ball can pass the V area 53 during the V long round game, so the big hit After the game, in principle, it is controlled in the probability variation gaming state until the next special symbol lottery is won. In addition, in the following, V long round game is executed (that is, as a rule, big hit A and big hit D which are controlled to high probability gaming state after big hit game) are collectively called continuous big hit, V long round game Is not executed (that is, not controlled to a high certainty state after a big hit game), the big hit B that can get a winning ball is referred to as a single hit big hit, a V long round game is not executed, and the winning ball is substantially There is a case that the big hit C that can not be obtained is a big hit. Further, as can be seen from (1) and (2) in FIG. 6, in the big hit breakdown due to the game ball winning at the second starting opening 22, the gaming state controlled after the big hit becomes an advantageous state (probable change gaming state) The percentage of consecutive big hits (75%) is higher than the percentage of consecutive big hits (50%) in the big hit breakdown due to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 21. In addition, the expected value of the number of rounds of the big hit by the game ball winning to the second starting opening 22 is higher than the expected value of the number of rounds of the big hitting by gaming ball to the first starting opening 21. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of profit when the second special symbol lottery is won is larger than the degree of profit when the first special symbol lottery is won.

[Overview of gaming system in this embodiment]
Next, a gaming system in a pachinko hall in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed will be described using FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic view of a gaming system in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed. As shown in FIG. 9, in the pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality (for example, 20) of the above-mentioned gaming machines 1 side by side. Each gaming machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the power supply 700 via a common power supply line. Therefore, turning on the power of the power supply 700 with the individual power switch of each gaming machine 1 set to "ON" (sending an input signal of the power supply from the power supply 700 to each gaming machine 1), one island A plurality of installed gaming machines 1 can be activated at the same time. Therefore, by installing the plurality of gaming machines 1 introduced to the pachinko hall for the first time on one island and activating them simultaneously, power can be supplied to the RTC 404 at the same timing. Therefore, the RTC 404 can start measuring the time at the same timing, and once the RTC 404 starts measuring the time, the sales of the pachinko hall is ended, and the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In order to continue measuring time by operating with an internal battery, each RTC 404 of a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island may measure time without shifting from the other RTC 404. it can. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses all the gaming machines 1 installed on the same island using the time information of the RTC 404 that has started measuring the time using such an activation method. The same effect (RTC effect described later) can be started simultaneously at the same timing.

  Next, the processing flow executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Main processing by main control unit 100]
First, the main processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The main process is started when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is continuously executed while the main control unit 100 is activated.

  In step S901 in FIG. 10, first, the CPU 101 waits for, for example, 2000 ms, and the process proceeds to step S902. Although not shown, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 can receive signals from the main control unit 100 without performing standby processing. . That is, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 can start the process earlier than the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100.

  In step S902, the CPU 101 can access the RAM 103, and the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (not shown) is "ON". If the determination in step S903 is YES, the process proceeds to step S904, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S907.

  In step S904, the CPU 101 clears the RAM. Here, the RAM clear is a well-known technique, and thus detailed description will be omitted. However, various information (for example, information indicating a game state) stored in the RAM 103 is a predetermined initial state. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, the CPU 101 sets a work area when the RAM is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, the CPU 101 performs initial setting of the peripheral portion. Here, the peripheral portion is the effect control unit 400, the payout control unit 300, and the like. Initial setting of the peripheral portion is performed by transmitting an initial setting command instructing execution of the initial setting to each control portion. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S910.

  In step S 907, the CPU 101 determines whether the backup flag is “ON”. The backup flag is a flag that is turned on when generation of backup data is normally completed when the power is shut off, and is a flag that indicates that the backup data is valid in association with the generated backup data. If the determination in step S 907 is YES, the process proceeds to step S 908. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S 904.

  In step S 908, the CPU 101 determines whether the checksum is normal. If the determination in step S908 is YES, the process proceeds to step S909, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S909, the CPU 101 executes a recovery process (see FIG. 12) described later, and the process proceeds to step S910.

  In step S 910, the CPU 101 sets the cycle (for example, 4 ms) of the built-in CTC (timer counter). The CPU 101 executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) described later using the cycle set here. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S911.

  In step S911, the CPU 101 executes a power off monitoring process (see FIG. 11) described later, and the process proceeds to step S912.

  In step S912, the CPU 101 performs setting for prohibiting an interrupt of the timer interrupt process, and the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, the CPU 101 updates (counts up) various initial value random numbers, and the process proceeds to step S914. Here, the initial value random number is for determining the start value of various random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) whose count is updated in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) described later. It is a random number, and a plurality of initial value random numbers are prepared corresponding to various random numbers. It should be noted that the initial value random number is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) generated every predetermined CTC cycle (4 ms) and the remaining time (that is, the processing time required for the timer interrupt process from the predetermined CTC cycle). Counting is updated in both of the main processing (see FIG. 10) processed at the reduced time), and returns to the minimum value (for example, 0) after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299) of the set random numbers. Further, since this remaining time varies depending on the processing status of the CPU 101, it is a random time, and the number of times of updating of the initial value random number updated with the remaining time is also random. On the other hand, although details will be described later, other various random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) are updated only by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). Processing cycle is different. Thus, even if the random number range of the initial value random number and the big hit random number is the same (for example, 0 to 299) due to the processing cycle being different, for example, the initial value random number The value will be random each time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the big hit random number value that causes the big hit is acquired.

  In step S914, the CPU 101 performs setting for permitting interruption of the timer interrupt process, and the process returns to step S911. That is, the CPU 101 repeatedly executes the processing of step S911 to step S914.

[Power-off monitoring process by main control unit 100]
FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S911 in FIG. In step S9111 of FIG. 11, the CPU 101 inhibits the interrupt processing, and the processing proceeds to step S9112.

  In step S9112, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cut off, based on whether or not the power supply cut-off signal has been input from a power supply unit (not shown). If the determination in step S9112 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9114. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9113.

  In step S9113, the CPU 101 permits the interrupt process and ends the power-off monitoring process (the process proceeds to step S912 in FIG. 10).

  On the other hand, in step S 9114, the CPU 101 clears the output port through which various information is input to and output from the CPU 101, and the process proceeds to step S 9115.

  In step S9115, the CPU 101 creates backup data in the RAM 103 based on the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and then creates a checksum from the contents of the RAM 103 and stores the checksum in the RAM 103. Note that this process detects that the power supply voltage starts to decrease due to the power supply cutoff of the power supply supplied to main control unit 100 (after determining “YES” in step S 9112). It takes place in the period until By this processing, gaming state information and the like immediately before the power is shut off is stored in the RAM 103. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9116.

  In step S9116, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to "ON", and the process proceeds to step S9117.

  In step S9117, the CPU 101 prohibits access to the RAM 103, and ends the power-off monitoring process (the process proceeds to step S912 in FIG. 10).

[Recovery processing by main control unit 100]
FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S909 of FIG. First, in step S9091 in FIG. 12, the CPU 101 sets a work area of the RAM 103 at the time of recovery, and the process proceeds to step S9092.

  In step S 9092, the CPU 101 refers to the information in the RAM 103 to check information regarding the gaming state at the time of power shutoff and the number of pending special symbol lotterys, and sends a recovery notification command including the information to the effect control unit 400 Send. As described above, the CPU 101 transmits, to the effect control unit 400, a recovery notification command indicating a state at the time of power shutoff, in order to notify that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored. By the process of step S9092, the effect control unit 400 can confirm the gaming state and the like before the power is turned off.

  In step S9093, the CPU 101 performs setting of the peripheral portion, and the process proceeds to step S9094.

  In step S9094, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to “OFF”, and ends the recovery processing (processing proceeds to step S910 in FIG. 10).

[Timer interrupt processing of main control unit]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 100. The timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 100 will be described below with reference to FIG. The main control unit 100 repeatedly executes a series of processing shown in FIG. 13 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the normal operation except for special cases such as power on and power off. The processing performed by the main control unit 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 13 and the subsequent drawings is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 102.

  First, in step S1, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 updates various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number, and becomes a start value when each random number is incremented and updated. Execute random number update processing to update each initial value random number. Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the winning or losing of the special symbol lottery (that is, performing the special symbol lottery). The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of the big hit when the special symbol lottery is won. The jackpot random number and the symbol random number are random numbers used in the process of step S407 of FIG. 17 described later. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not the reach effect is to be performed when the special symbol lottery is defeated. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol. Here, the variation time of the special symbol is equal to the execution time of the notification effect (variation effect) executed in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. The reach random number and the variation pattern random number are used in the process of step S408 in FIG. 17 described later. In the random number updating process of step S1, the big hit random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the like are respectively added one by one and updated. That is, it is counted up. And each random number is acquired in the starting opening switch (SW) process of step S2 and the gate switch (SW) process of step S3, and it is used by the special symbol process of step S4 mentioned later and the ordinary symbol process of step S5. Note that the counter that performs the process of step S1 is typically a loop counter, and returns to 0 again after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 in the variation pattern random number) (that is, the cycle). To do). In the random number update process in step S1, each counter such as a big hit random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number has an initial value corresponding to each random number at that time when the loop counter counts once. A random number is acquired, and counting of the loop counter is newly started with the value of the initial value random number as a start value. In addition, although the random number ranges such as the big hit random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number may be set arbitrarily, the value of the counter (count It is preferable to set the values not to be synchronized.

  Next, in step S2, the CPU 101 monitors the states of the first start port switch 111a and the second start port switch 111b, and when any switch is turned on (the first start port switch 111a or the second start) Starting point switch that performs processing related to the number U1 of holding the first special symbol lottery and the number U2 of holding the second special symbol lottery and processing of acquiring various random numbers at the time when the detection signal of the game ball is output from the mouth switch 111b). Execute the process The details of the starting opening switch processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S3, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the gate switch 113, and it is determined that the gaming ball has passed the gate 25 based on the output signal from the gate switch 113. Judges whether it is less than the upper limit (for example 4), and when it is judged that the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, executes gate switch processing to acquire the random number used for the normal symbol processing in step S5 described later .

  Next, in step S4, the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, and after displaying the special symbols variably on the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b, The display processing of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of and the special symbol processing for transmitting various commands to the effect control unit 400 are executed. The special symbol process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S5, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing to determine whether the random number acquired in the gate switch processing in step S3 matches a predetermined random number. Then, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 4e to variably display the normal symbol, and then causes the normal symbol indicating the determination result to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the normal symbol variation time to be stopped and displayed after the normal symbol is variably displayed, to 10 seconds in the non-time-short state and to 0.5 seconds in the time-short state. In addition, the CPU 101 sets the probability that the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 4e will be a predetermined hit symbol (that is, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery) to the low probability (1/10) in the non-time-short state. In the short time, raise to high probability (10/10).

  Next, in step S6, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery is won in the special symbol processing in step S4 (when a big hit is found), the CPU 101 controls the first big winning opening opening and closing unit 115 to The large winning opening 23 is made to perform a predetermined opening and closing operation, and the second large winning opening opening and closing unit 118 is controlled to make the second large winning opening 51 perform a predetermined opening and closing operation. A special winning opening process for transmitting etc. to the effect control unit 400 is executed. By this processing, the jackpot game (special game) is advanced, and the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. The special winning opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in step S7, when the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 4e by the normal symbol processing in step S5 is a predetermined winning symbol (that is, when the normal symbol lottery is won), the CPU 101 is electrically powered. The electric tulip process which operates the tulip 27 is performed. At that time, the CPU 101 opens and controls the electric tulip 27 for a very short time (0.10 seconds once) in the non-electric support state, and in the electric support state for a long period (3 times 2.00 seconds). Open control. In addition, it becomes a state where a game ball can be won in the 2nd starting opening 22 by being controlled by an open state of electric tulip 27, and a 2nd special symbol lottery goes by a game ball being won in the 2nd starting opening 22 It will be

  Next, in step S8, the CPU 101 executes a winning ball process for controlling the number of winning game balls and controlling the payout of winning balls according to the winning.

  Next, in step S9, the CPU 101 executes various commands and effects set in the RAM 103 by the start opening switch processing in step S2, the special symbol processing in step S4, the special winning opening processing in step S6, and the prize ball processing in step S8. An output process is performed to output information necessary for the presentation control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300. Note that the CPU 101 plays a game in each of the first winning opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, and the normal winning opening 24 each time the game ball wins. A winning command for notifying that the ball has won is set in the RAM 103, and the winning command is output to the effect control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300.

[About control time count processing]
Here, although the description has been omitted in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 13, in this timer interrupt process, the CPU 101 measures a series of control times on the special symbol game side using one timer function. Control time count processing on the game side (referred to as "special game game count processing") and control time count processing on the normal symbol game side that measures a series of control times on the normal symbol game side using one timer function (" The game is called "general game play count processing". The special figure game counting process and the drawing game counting process are sequentially performed, for example, between the process of step S7 of FIG. 13 and the process of step S8. In the special symbol game, waiting for the game ball to reach the starting opening (21 or 22) and repeating the special symbol lottery in response to the game ball having a prize, and repeatedly notifying the lottery result, When a special symbol lottery is won, it is a game for executing a big hit game. In addition, the normal symbol game waits for the passage of the game ball to the gate 25, repeats the normal symbol lottery in response to the passage of the game ball and reports the lottery result, and the normal symbol lottery is won. In this case, the opening and closing control of the electric tulip 27 (the open game of the electric chew) is executed.

  In the following, first, the special figure game counting process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing data used when executing the special-figure game count process and the common-figure game count process, and a storage area (work area) of the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100.

  (1) of FIG. 14 shows types of data (referred to as “special drawing side setting data”) for setting (specifying) the count target time on the special symbol game side. The special drawing side setting data is data for setting which one of the periods (hours) of the special symbol game is being measured. During each period (time) of this special symbol game, as shown in (1) of FIG. , "In opening display", "in round", "during winning prize winning period", and "in displaying".

  "Waiting for start opening winning" is a state (period) that can execute the special symbol lottery pertaining to the starting opening winning immediately when there is a starting opening winning and can start the variation display of the special symbol, typically, It is not a big hit game, nor is it a state which is not in the stop display of the regulation time even during the change display of the special symbol. “During special symbol variation display” is a state (period) in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the starting opening winning, and the variation display of the special symbol is executed on the display 4. “During special symbol stop display” is a state (period) in which the special symbol that has been variably displayed on the display unit 4 is completely stopped and displayed for a specified time (0.5 seconds) in the display mode informing the special symbol lottery result It is. “Opening display” is a state (period) displaying an opening effect notifying that the big hit game has been started on the image display section 6 by winning the special symbol lottery. "During a round" is a state (period) in which a round (round game) is executed in which the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 is opened in the big hit game. The "big winning opening valid period" is arranged immediately after each round, and the first large size of the gaming ball despite the round ending and the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 51 being blocked. It is a period during which winning in the winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 is recognized as effective, whereby a so-called over winning can be recognized. It should be noted that winning of the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 of the gaming ball is not recognized as valid in the period during the round and the period excluding the large winning opening effective period. “During displaying” is a state (period) in which an ending effect notifying that the big hit game is ended is displayed on the image display unit 6.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 14, for example, the special figure side setting data “00H” is data for setting that “starting opening winning await” is waiting. It is data to set that "in special symbol variation display". Note that these special drawing side setting data are stored in the ROM 102.

  (3) of FIG. 14 is a schematic view of a storage area (working area) of the RAM 103. As shown in (3) of FIG. 14, the storage area of the RAM 103 includes a count target time setting area 10, a time count area 11, and a simple variation display time count area 12. The count target time setting area 10 includes a count target time setting area 10A (referred to as "area 10A") on the special symbol game side and a count target time setting area 10B (referred to as "area 10B") on the normal symbol game side. The time count area 11 includes a time count area 11A (referred to as "area 11A") on the special symbol game side and a time count area 11B (referred to as "area 11B") on the normal symbol game side. The simple variation display time count area 12 includes a simple variation display time count area 12A (referred to as "area 12A") on the special symbol game side and a simple variation display time count area 12B on the normal symbol game side ("area 12B" It consists of

  The area 11A is a timer area for measuring the elapsed time of each period of the above special symbol game (in the special symbol variation display, etc.), and writes one time data and measures it for one elapsed time It is a timer area for The area 10A is an area for setting the type of time to be measured in the area 11A by writing any one of the special drawing side setting data described using (1) in FIG. The area 12A changes the three display modes of this 7-segment display every 48 milliseconds when the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4a (or the second special symbol display 4b) in the 7-segment display. It is a timer area for measuring the lapse of time of 48 milliseconds when executing control to switch to the order in order and to perform cyclic display, and is a timer area for writing one piece of time data and measuring for one lapse of time is there. Note that the three display modes of the 7-segment display described above are, for example, a display mode that indicates the number 0, a display mode that indicates the number 7, and a display mode in which all seven segments are extinguished.

  The CPU 101 sets the type of the period (time) to be measured by the area 11A by writing the special drawing side setting data in the area 10A, and writes the time data to be measured in the area 11A. The timer data (area 11A) is used in order by subtracting the value of the time data of area 11A one by one by the special figure game count process executed every millisecond, and the lapse of each period of the special symbol game Measure in order.

  Further, when the time of special symbol variation display is measured in the area 11A, the CPU 101 writes data ("12") for a predetermined time in the area 12A and executes every four milliseconds in the timer interrupt process of FIG. When the value of the time data in the area 12A is decremented by one by the special figure game counting process to be 0, the predetermined time data ("12") is written again and the display mode of the special symbol is switched. Thereby, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4a (or the second special symbol display 4b) in the 7-segment display, the three display modes of the 7-segment display are every 48 milliseconds. It will be cyclically displayed by switching in order.

  In addition, in (3) of FIG. 14, it is setting that time progress of a special symbol variation display is measured in area 11A by writing "01H" in area 10A as an example. Also, as an example, a value "2500" indicating time is written in the area 11A of (3) of FIG. 14, but this value is decremented by 1 every 4 milliseconds by the timer interrupt processing of FIG. As updated, this value "2500" indicates 10.000 seconds. Also, as an example, the value "12" indicating time is written in the area 12A of (3) of FIG. 14, but this value is similarly decremented by 1 every 4 milliseconds by the timer interrupt processing of FIG. This value "12" indicates 48 milliseconds because it is updated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a series of control times of the special symbol game are measured using one timer function (see 11A of (3) in FIG. 14). Here, in the conventional gaming machine, each control time (special symbol variation display control time, round execution control time, etc.) constituting the special symbol game is measured using an individual timer function, respectively. In the memory area of the RAM of the main control unit, an individual time count area is provided for each control time constituting the special symbol game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, a series of control times of the special symbol game are measured using one timer function, so that the calculation load can be effectively reduced. Further, according to the present embodiment, three symbol patterns of 7-segment display are sequentially switched every 48 milliseconds and cyclically displayed on the special symbol display 4a (or 4b) during the execution period of the special symbol variation display. To measure the switching time, a timer function (see 12A in (3) in FIG. 14) different from the above timer function (see 11A in (3) in FIG. 14) is used. From this, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively suppress the complication of the arithmetic processing.

  FIG. 15: is an example of the conceptual diagram of the fluctuation time table used in order to set the time of special symbol fluctuation display to area 11A. The fluctuation time table is stored in the ROM 102, read out to the RAM 103, and used. As shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time table includes identification numbers of fluctuation patterns, data indicating basic fluctuation times (seconds), and data indicating addition fluctuation times (seconds). The identification number of the fluctuation pattern is to identify the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern determination table HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3 and HT4 described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. Is the number of The basic fluctuation time is a basic fluctuation time that constitutes a fluctuation pattern (that is, special symbol fluctuation time). The addition variation time is an added variation time that constitutes a variation pattern. The time obtained by adding the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time is a fluctuation pattern. For example, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the identification number 5 is 90.06 seconds obtained by adding the addition fluctuation time 0.06 seconds to the basic fluctuation time 90 seconds, for example, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the identification number 26 is the basic fluctuation time 8 seconds. Note that FIG. 15 only shows an example of the fluctuation pattern, and not all the fluctuation patterns are displayed.

  When CPU 101 measures the time of special symbol variation display in area 11A of (3) of FIG. 14, the time data ("second") corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the process of step S408 of FIG. (Data showing the time of) is read out from the fluctuation time table (see FIG. 15) of the RAM 103, and the read out time data is multiplied by 250 to convert it to time data suitable for time measurement processing executed in a 4 millisecond cycle. Then, the converted time data is written to the area 11A of the RAM 103. For example, when setting the value of time data indicating the fluctuation pattern "90.06 seconds" corresponding to the identification number 5 in the area 11A, the basic fluctuation time of 90 seconds and the addition fluctuation time of 0.06 from the fluctuation time table of the RAM 103. The time data representing the second is read out and added, and the added time data is multiplied by 250 to be converted into time data “22515” that is adapted to arithmetic processing of a 4 millisecond cycle, and the converted time data “22515” is converted to RAM 103 Write to area 11A of Note that, next to the fluctuation time table in FIG. 15, for reference, time data that is multiplied by 250 and adapted to arithmetic processing with a 4 millisecond period is described, but multiplication by 250 results in non-natural numbers Things (see the value in parentheses) are processed by adjusting to natural numbers by rounding off.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the time data indicating the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) of the fluctuation time table stored in the ROM 102 and read out to the RAM 103 is data indicating the time of “seconds” (that is, the division value Time data (refer to the basic fluctuation time part of FIG. 15), and when setting a special symbol fluctuation time, it is multiplied by 250 and time data adapted to arithmetic processing of a 4 millisecond cycle (that is, time of multiplication value Data (refer to the right side of the fluctuation time table of FIG. 15). From this, according to the present embodiment, the data indicating the special symbol variation time of the variation time table may be suppressed to a data amount of 1 byte or less (for example, the identification numbers 24 to 26 in FIG. 15). And the memory area used by the RAM 103 can be effectively suppressed. In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, the special symbol fluctuation time of 90.04 seconds, even for the special symbol fluctuation time of which the data amount exceeds 1 byte even if indicated by the time data of division value The fluctuation time table is configured by dividing as data (time data indicating time below the decimal point) (see FIG. 15). Here, in FIG. 15, the same time data value is described for each fluctuation pattern for convenience of explanation in the table of the addition fluctuation time part, but in fact, the same time data value is overlapped in this table. Is not stored, only one is stored. For example, in the table of the addition variation time portion, although three time data values of 0.04 seconds are described in FIG. 15 for convenience of explanation, only one time is actually stored. From this, according to the present embodiment, the used memory area of the ROM 102 and the RAM 103 can be effectively suppressed. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, 32 variation patterns are provided (see FIG. 15). However, in an actual gaming machine, the variation patterns are enormous, such as 1,000 to 10,000. From this, the effect of the above-described use memory area suppression according to the present embodiment becomes great in an actual game machine.

  Next, a common-play game counting process of measuring a series of control times on the normal symbol game side using one timer function will be described with reference to FIG.

  (2) in FIG. 14 shows types of data (hereinafter, referred to as “normal drawing side setting data”) for setting (specifying) the count target time on the normal symbol game side. The common drawing side setting data is data for setting which period of each period (time) of the normal symbol game is being measured. In each period (time) of this normal symbol game, as shown in (2) of FIG. It includes "during power on / off control" and "during the second start opening effective period".

  “Waiting to pass the gate” is a state (period) in which a normal symbol lottery relating to this passage can be immediately executed to start variation display of the normal symbol immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 25. It is not during opening / closing control of the tulip 27 (during opening game of electric chew), not during the second starting opening effective period to be described later, nor during the variation display of the normal symbol or the stop display of the specified time. "During normal symbol variation display" is a state (period) in which normal symbol lottery is executed according to the passage of the gate 25 of the gaming ball and variation display of the normal symbol is executed on the display 4. "During normal symbol stop display" is a state (period) in which the normal symbol which has been variably displayed on the display 4 is completely stopped and displayed for a specified time (0.5 seconds) in the display mode informing the normal symbol lottery result It is. "During electric chow opening and closing control" is a state (period) in which the winning of the normal symbol lottery is won and the opening and closing control of electric electric tulip 27 (the open game of electric chow) is executed. The “second start opening valid period” is a period in which it is exceptionally recognized that the game ball winning in the second start opening 22 is valid for a predetermined period immediately after the opening and closing control of the electric tulip 27 is finished. In addition, during the opening and closing control of the electric tulip 27, game ball winning in the second starting opening 22 is uniformly recognized (that is, even when the electric tulip 27 is in the closed state), the opening and closing control of the electric tulip 27 is under control. The game ball winning on the second starting opening 22 is not recognized as valid during the period excluding the second starting opening valid period.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 14, for example, the drawing side setting data “00 K” is data for setting that “gate passing waiting” is set. Also, the drawing side setting data is stored in the ROM 102.

  This will be described below with reference to (3) in FIG. The area 11B is a timer area for measuring the elapsed time of each period of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol game (in the "normal symbol variation display etc."), writing one time data and measuring one elapsed time It is a timer area for The area 10B is an area for setting the type of time to be measured in the area 11B by writing any one of the drawing-side setting data described using (2) in FIG. In the area 12B, when the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 4e (refer to FIG. 2), the two display modes of this multi-colored display (display mode in which only the circle is lit and display in which only the cross is illuminated) (Aspect) is a timer area for measuring the time lapse of 48 milliseconds when executing control to switch and alternate display every 48 milliseconds, write one time data and measure for one time lapse It is a timer area for

  The CPU 101 sets the type of measurement target period in the area 11B by writing the general drawing side setting data in the area 10B, and also writes the time data to be measured in the area 11B, every 4 milliseconds in the timer interrupt process of FIG. The timer data (area 11B) is used in order by subtracting the value of the time data of area 11B one by one by the common drawing game count process executed in the order of each symbol of the normal symbol game Do.

  Further, when the time of normal symbol variation display is measured in area 11B, CPU 101 writes data ("12") for a predetermined time in area 12B and executes every four milliseconds in the timer interrupt process of FIG. When the value of the time data in the area 12B is decremented one by one by the common drawing game counting process and becomes 0, the predetermined time data ("12") is written again and the display mode of the normal symbol is switched. As a result, when the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 4e, the two display modes of the display are alternately switched and displayed every 48 milliseconds.

  From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the same effect as the special drawing game counting process described above, in the common drawing game counting process.

In the configuration of measuring the series of control time of the special symbol game described above using one timer function, the first big winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening immediately after the big winning opening effective period in the control of the big hit game A special winning opening pause period may be provided in which the winning of the winning opening 51 is not considered valid.
Also, for example, the first special symbol lottery display and the special symbol stop display, and the second special symbol lottery special symbol change display and the special symbol stop display can be executed in parallel with the control configuration, for example, the first (1) Measure the control time of the special symbol variation display and the special symbol stop display by the special symbol lottery and the control time regarding the big hit game by the winning of the first special symbol lottery using one timer function, while the second The control time for the special symbol variation display and the special symbol stop display by the special symbol lottery and the control time for the big hit game by the winning of the second special symbol lottery may be measured using one other timer function.
In addition, when measuring a series of control times of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game using one timer function, the elapsed time of the measurement target time is measured not by the "subtraction" process but by the "addition" process. It may be In this case, for example, whether or not the value of the timer (11A) of the special symbol game has reached the value "125" of the time data indicating the time to be measured (for example, 0.5 seconds of the special symbol stop display) Control to determine the
Further, as described above, in addition to storing only one time data value without redundantly storing the same time data value in the table of the addition variation time part of FIG. 15, in the table of the basic variation time part of FIG. Also, the same time data value may be stored without overlapping and stored one more to further enhance the effect of suppressing the used memory area.
Moreover, you may measure the execution time of the various presentation performed by the presentation control part 400 grade | etc., By the method demonstrated above.

  This is the end of the description of the control time counting process.

[Starting port switch processing]
FIG. 16 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the starting opening switch process in step S2 of FIG. The starting opening switch process in step S2 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 wins the game ball in the first starting opening 21 based on the presence or absence of the output signal from the first starting opening switch 111a, and the first starting opening switch 111a is turned on. It is determined whether the If the determination in step S201 is YES, the process proceeds to step S202. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S202, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit value Umax1 ("4" in the present embodiment) of the pending number of the first special symbol lottery from the ROM 102, and the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery stored in the RAM 103 is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is less than the value Umax1. If the determination in step S202 is YES, the process proceeds to step S203, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding one. Further, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a winning command for notifying the effect control unit 400 that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 21. The winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the CPU 101 acquires a set of random numbers used for the first special symbol lottery etc. (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), and each set of acquired random numbers (game information) Are stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. The above-mentioned random number set stored in the RAM 103 is sequentially set from the earliest stored time each time the value of the number U1 of holding the first special symbol lottery is decremented by 1 in the process of step S406 in FIG. 17 described later. Are deleted one by one. From this, for example, when the value of the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "3", the most recent three sets of the above-mentioned random numbers obtained by the processing of step S204 for the last three times are stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. It will be stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205.

  In step S205, the CPU 101 performs an advance determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets a random number such as a big hit random number obtained in the process of the most recent step S 204 and stored in the RAM 103 (that is, a random number set such as a big hit random number for the first special symbol lottery stored most recently). Whether or not the result of the first special symbol lottery using this big hit random number is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number etc. matches the predetermined value etc. stored in the ROM 102, It is determined in advance whether or not to execute an effect. That is, the determination necessary to execute the preview advance notice effect and the hold change notice effect is determined in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 17 described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S206, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a first hold number increase command notifying that the hold number of the first special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, the first pending number increase command includes information (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-judgment information”) indicating the result of the pre-judgment performed in the process of step S205. In addition, the lottery result for the suspension of the first special symbol lottery is a symbol in the first special symbol lottery by the first pending number increase command including the prior determination information being output by the output process of step S9 of FIG. The main control unit 100 notifies the effect control unit 400 before the change is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S207, based on the presence or absence of the output signal from the second starting opening switch 111b, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting opening 22 and the second starting opening switch 111b has become ON. Do. If the determination in step S207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S208. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) of FIG.

  In step S208, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit value Umax2 ("4" in the present embodiment) of the pending number of the second special symbol lottery from the ROM 102, and the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery stored in the RAM 103 is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is less than the value Umax2. If the determination in step S208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S209. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) of FIG.

  In step S209, the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding one. Further, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a winning command for notifying the effect control unit 400 that the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 22. The winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, the CPU 101 acquires a set of random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) used for the second special symbol lottery etc., and sets each acquired random number to time series It stores in order in RAM103. The above-mentioned random number set stored in the RAM 103 is sequentially set from the earliest stored time each time the value of the number U2 of holding the second special symbol lottery is decremented by 1 by the process of step S404 in FIG. 17 described later. Are deleted one by one. From this, for example, when the value of the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery is "3", the most recent three sets of random numbers acquired by the processing of step S210 of the most recent three times are stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. It will be stored. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S211.

  In step S211, the CPU 101 performs an advance determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets a random number such as a big hit random number obtained in the process of the most recent step S210 and stored in the RAM 103 (that is, a random number set such as a big hit random number for the second special symbol lottery stored most recently). Whether or not the result of the second special symbol lottery using this big hit random number is a big hit, based on whether or not this big hit random number etc. matches the predetermined value etc. stored in the ROM 102, It is determined in advance whether or not to execute an effect. That is, the determination necessary to execute the preview advance notice effect and the hold change notice effect is determined in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 17 described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a second hold number increase command notifying that the hold number of the second special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, the second holding number increase command includes information (pre-judgment information) indicating the result of the pre-judgment performed in the process of step S211. In addition, the lottery result for the suspension of the second special symbol lottery is a symbol in the second special symbol lottery by the second pending number increase command including the prior determination information being output by the output process of step S9 of FIG. The main control unit 100 notifies the effect control unit 400 before the change is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) of FIG.

[Special symbol processing]
FIG. 17 is an example of a detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. The special symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 is in the current state of the gaming machine 1 in the big hit game (big hit gaming state) based on the information stored in the RAM 103 (information by the big hit gaming flag described later). It is determined whether the That is, it is determined whether or not the big hit game (special game) executed when the special symbol lottery is won is being executed. If the determination in step S401 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) of FIG. 13. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, the CPU 101 determines whether or not variation display of a special symbol by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b is being performed. Here, during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop symbol (special movement) is displayed after the special symbol fluctuates and displays a predetermined fluctuation time (variation time determined by the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection processing in step S408 described later) Designated symbol showing determination result of symbol lottery) indicates that it is within the entire period when it is stopped and displayed for a predetermined fixed time (for example, predetermined 0.5 seconds). Therefore, in other words, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is during the variation time in which the special symbol is varied or in the determination time in which the determination symbol is stopped. If the determination in step S402 is YES, the process proceeds to step S411. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, the CPU 101 determines whether the number of reservations U2 stored in the RAM 103 is one or more (that is, whether or not the second special symbol lottery is being held). If the determination in step S403 is YES, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S404, the CPU 101 updates the number of reservations U2 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. Further, at that time, the CPU 101 reads out from the random number set stored in the RAM 103 and acquired at step S 210 of FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S407.

  On the other hand, in step S405, CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reservations U1 stored in RAM 103 is one or more (that is, whether or not the first special symbol lottery is being held). If the determination in step S405 is YES, the process proceeds to step S406. If the determination is NO, it is considered that there is no special symbol lottery to be executed, and the process proceeds to step S415.

  In step S406, the CPU 101 updates the number of reservations U1 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. At this time, the CPU 101 reads out from the random number set stored and acquired at step S 204 in FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S407.

  By the above-described processes of steps S403 to S406, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

  In step S407, the CPU 101 executes a big hit determination process of determining whether the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss. Specifically, when the process of step S407 is executed following the process of step S404, the CPU 101 matches the jackpot random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S404 with the jackpot value of the jackpot stored in the ROM 102. Based on whether or not to do, it is determined whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss. On the other hand, when the process of step S407 is performed following the process of step S406, the CPU 101 determines whether the big hit random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S406 matches the winning value of the big hit stored in the ROM 102. Based on the heel, it is determined whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss. Then, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the CPU 101 sets a lost symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery is lost in the RAM 103 as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the setting information. On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, which of the predetermined values stored in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used for this determination Based on the type of the current big hit. Then, the CPU 101 sets information on the jackpot symbol representing the type of the jackpot and the jackpot in the RAM 103 as information on the stop symbol of the special symbol in the setting information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, the CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern selection processing for selecting a special symbol fluctuation time. The variation pattern selection process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process of step S408 of FIG.

[Variation pattern selection process]
In step S <b> 4081 of FIG. 18, the CPU 101 determines whether the normal short time flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the normal short time flag is set to "OFF" so that the gaming state is controlled in the non short time state and the non power saving state, and by being set to "ON", the gaming state is short time status and the power supporting state The flag is controlled by and is set to “OFF” as an initial setting, and by the processing of step S6253 or step S6255 of FIG. It is set to "ON" after the big hit game of single hit big hit). That is, in step S4081, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (power support state) after the big hit game of continuous big hit or single shot big hit. If the determination in step S4081 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4085, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4082.

  In step S4082, the CPU 101 determines whether the special short time flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the special time short flag is set to "OFF" so that the gaming state is controlled in the non short time state and the non power saving state, and by being set to "ON", the gaming state is short time status and the power supporting state The flag is controlled by and is set to "OFF" as an initial setting, and is set to "ON" after a big hit game of big hit (big hit C) by the processing of step S6257 of FIG. 29 described later. That is, in step S4082, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (power support state) after the big hit game of the big hit at the time of the collision. If the determination in step S4082 is YES (that is, if it is a time saving state after the big hit), the process proceeds to step S4084, and if this determination is NO (that is, the non-time saving state (in the present embodiment, latent game Since the state is not provided (in the normal gaming state)), the processing proceeds to step S4083.

  In step S4083, the CPU 101 sets HT1-1 (see FIG. 19) or HT1-2 (see FIG. 20) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4084, the CPU 101 sets HT3 (see FIG. 23) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4085, the CPU 101 determines whether the high-probability flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the high certainty flag is a flag in which the gaming state is controlled in the low certainty state by being set to "OFF", and the gaming state is controlled in the high certainty state by being set to "ON", The initial setting is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” by the process of step S6252 of FIG. 29 described later. Therefore, in step S4085, the CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state after the big hit game. If the determination in step S 4085 is YES (that is, if it is a short and high probability state after consecutive big hit), the process proceeds to step S 4086, and if this determination is NO (that is, the time saving state after a single shot big hit and If it is in the low probability state), the process proceeds to step S4087.

  In step S4086, the CPU 101 sets HT2-1 (see FIG. 21) or HT2-2 (see FIG. 22) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4087, the CPU 101 sets HT4 (see FIG. 24) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4088, the CPU 101 selects a variation pattern (variation time of special symbol) based on the set variation table set, and the process proceeds to step S409 in FIG.

  Here, the details of the process of selecting a fluctuation pattern using the above-described fluctuation pattern determination table HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3, and HT4 (the process of step S4089), as shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. Here, this variation pattern is a special symbol variation time which is a time from when the special symbol is variably displayed on the display 4 until it is stopped and displayed, and this special symbol variation time is synchronized with the execution time of the notification effect. It is the same time as the execution time of the informing effect. In the following, the variation pattern determination table HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3, and HT4 are simply referred to as HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3. , And may be called HT4.

First, the case of selecting a variation pattern using HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 in the normal gaming state (non-short time state) will be described. FIG. 19 is a table used for determining a variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-short time state). FIG. 20 is a table used for determining a variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-short time state).

[Variation pattern selection process in normal gaming state / first special symbol lottery]
In the following, determination of a variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-short time state) will be described using FIG.

  In step S408, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) based on the fluctuation pattern random number. Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the variation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination processing in step S407 to be a "big hit" of HT1-1. The variation pattern (special symbol variation time) is determined based on which one of the random numbers assigned to each variation pattern of the part of the symbol matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination processing in step S407 is “78”, the CPU 101 changes the variation pattern “90.03 of“ big hit ”in HT1-1. Since it corresponds to the random number value “75 to 124” assigned to “seconds”, “90.03 seconds” is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Here, as shown in HT1-1, the fluctuation patterns of the "big hit" portion "15.01 seconds", "15.02 seconds", "40.01 seconds", "40.02 seconds", "90. "01 seconds", "90.02 seconds", "90.03 seconds", "90.04 seconds" and "90.05 seconds" are the types of effect patterns of the notification effect "per reach", "false 1" “Per hit”, “per pseudo 2”, “per SP”, “per pseudo 3”, “per fourth SPSP”, “per third SPSP”, “per second SPSP” and “per first SPSP”. Also, "per reach" is a type that makes a big hit after reach is established, and "per SP" is a type that makes a big hit after it finally develops into a SP reach, and "from 1st SPSP" to "4th SPSP" is It is a type that makes a big hit after developing into various SPSP reach finally. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a selected theater reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68 described later) is performed as one of the fourth SPSP reach effects, and a partial theater is performed as one of the SP reach effects. A reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68 described later) is executed. In addition, “per one pseudo one”, “per one pseudo 2”, “per pseudo 3” is a pseudo that a decorative symbol once displayed on temporary stop is changed and displayed again after the decorative symbol is displayed on temporary stop on the pseudo consecutive symbol. It is a type that makes a big hit through a series production. Here, the pseudo run symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed as a temporary stop at the end, which is a trigger for re-variation display, and is, for example, a “7” symbol. In addition, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol means that the symbol can be stopped in such a manner that the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped, and it is not a complete stop. It is displayed in the state of This indicates that the special symbol is still changing. More specifically, “per pseudo 1” is a type that makes a big hit after passing through a pseudo rendition that is displayed once re-varied, and “per pseudo 2” is a pseudo rendition that is displayed twice re-varied "Per 3" is a type that is hit after passing through a pseudo-sequence effect that is re-displayed three times. Further, as will be apparent from the following description, in this pseudo-series effect, it is suggested that the larger the number of re-variation display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the pseudo-series number), the higher the jackpot reliability. It should be noted that the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol means that it is stopped in such a manner that the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol has stopped, and it is not a complete stop. It is displayed in the state of This indicates that the special symbol is still changing.

  In addition, with the reach (reach effect), when the decorative symbol to be stopped last among a plurality of decorative symbols in the notification effect is stopped and displayed by a specific symbol, it is specified together with other symbols already stopped. It is an effect that is expected to be a big hit by matching the pattern pattern of, typically, the decorative pattern on the right and left side has stopped at the same pattern (for example 7), the center of which is stopped at the end It is an effect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in expectation of stopping at the same symbol (for example, 7) (that is, it becomes Zoro eyes 777). In addition, SP reach is generally referred to as super reach or special reach, and is an effect that is expected to further make a big hit than reach, and is, for example, an effect of moving images in which a main character plays a mini game. In addition, SPSP reach is generally referred to as super super reach or special special reach, and is an effect that makes the jackpot more expected than the SP reach effect, for example, a moving image in which the main character fights against the enemy character is there.

  When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss in the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 is based on the number of pending first special symbol lottery (U1), reach random number, and variation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time).

  Specifically, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”, the CPU 101 obtains the reach random number read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407. Reach random number range "70 ~" whether any one of ~ 99 is included in reach random number range "0-69" of the part of the number of reservations "1, 2" of "Hold" in HT1-1. It is determined whether it is included in "99".

  Then, when the read reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 69”, the CPU 101 reads the fluctuation pattern random number (0 It is determined whether any one of 299 to 299 is included in the variation pattern random value range “0 to 59” or in the variation pattern random value range “60 to 299”. Then, when the fluctuation pattern random number is included in the fluctuation pattern random number value range “0 to 59”, the CPU 101 determines “8.00 seconds” as the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern random number falls within the fluctuation pattern random number value range “ When it is included in 60 to 299 "," 13. 50 seconds "is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Here, as shown in HT1-1, the fluctuation patterns "8.00 seconds" and "13.50 seconds" correspond to the type "immediate loss" of the effect pattern of the informing effect. Note that "immediate loss" is a type of effect pattern in which there is no establishment of a reach and an immediate loss.

  On the other hand, when the read reach random number is included in the reach random number range “70 to 99”, the CPU 101 changes the variation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination process of step S407. Based on which one of the variation pattern random number value ranges allocated to the respective variation patterns of the above-described reach random number value range “70 to 99” of HT1-1. To determine the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time). For example, when the variation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination processing in step S407 is “260”, the CPU 101 is a variation pattern random number value allocated to the variation pattern “40.03 seconds” Since it is included in the range “256 to 271”, “40.03 seconds” is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Here, as shown in HT1-1, fluctuation patterns “15.03 seconds”, “15.04 seconds”, “40.03 seconds” of the above-described reach random value range “70 to 99” of HT1-1. , "40.04 seconds", "90.06 seconds", "90.07 seconds", "90.08 seconds", "90.09 seconds" and "90.10 seconds" The types of effect patterns "reach loss", "false 1 loss", "false 2 loss", "SP lost", "false 3 loss", "4th SPSP loss", "3rd SPSP loss", "2nd SPSP loss" and " It corresponds to "1st SPSP lost". In addition, “reach loss” is a type that loses after reaching a reach, and “SP loss” is a type that loses after being finally developed into a SP reach, “first SPSP loss” to “fourth SPSP loss” is a final It is a type that loses after being developed into various SPSP reach, and “pseudo 1 loss”, “pseudo 2 loss” and “pseudo 3 loss” have re-variation display frequency (pseudo run count) once and 2 It is a type that loses after passing through three pseudo-series effects.

  In addition, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “3”, the CPU 101 basically changes the variation pattern in the same manner as the case where the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. Decide. However, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “3”, the CPU 101 indicates, as shown in HT1-1, the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery described above is “1” or “2”. On the other hand, the reach random number range “0 to 69” is replaced with “0 to 79”, and the reach random number range “70 to 99” is replaced with “80 to 99”, and the fluctuation pattern “8.00 seconds” The fluctuation pattern random number value range "0 to 59" allocated to is replaced with "0 to 209", and the fluctuation pattern random number value range "60 to 299" allocated to the fluctuation pattern "13.50 seconds" is "210 to 299 The fluctuation pattern is determined according to the random value range replaced with "."

  In addition, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “4”, the CPU 101 basically changes the fluctuation pattern in the same manner as the case where the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. Decide. However, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is “4”, the CPU 101 indicates that the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery described above is “1” or “2” as shown in HT1-1. , The reach random number range “0 to 69” is replaced with “0 to 84”, the reach random number range “70 to 99” is replaced with “85 to 99”, and the variation pattern “8.00 seconds” Change pattern random number range "0-59" assigned to "210 to 269" and change pattern random number range "60-299" assigned to change pattern "13.50 seconds" to "270-299" Furthermore, according to the type “immediate loss of effect” of the effect pattern, the fluctuation pattern “3.00 second” to which the fluctuation pattern random value range “0 to 209” is allocated is added, according to the random value range of the contents added Determine the fluctuation pattern To.

  As described above using the variation pattern determination table HT1-1 shown in FIG. 19, when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the normal gaming state (non-short time state), the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is Is smaller, the variation pattern with reach is more likely to be selected, and when the variation pattern without reach is selected, the longer variation pattern is more likely to be selected as the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is smaller.

[Rich hit reliability]
Here, the big hit reliability (big hit expectation) will be described. A big hit reliability is a production that is highly likely to be notified of a big hit when the production is performed, and a big hit with a low reliability is a big hit when the production is performed It is an effect that is unlikely to be played. This will be specifically described below using HT1-1 shown in FIG. As can be seen from the "big hit" part of HT1-1, in the case of the big hit, "per reach", "per pseudo 1", "per pseudo 2", "per SP", "per pseudo 3", "third The variation pattern random number value range is large (with the same in part) in the order of “per 4 SPSP”, “per third SPSP”, “per second SPSP”, and “per first SPSP”. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, as shown in the "losing" part of HT1-1, "reach losing", "pseudo 1 losing", "pseudo 2 losing", "SP losing", "pseudo 3 losing", The fluctuation pattern random number value range is reduced in the order of “4th SPSP loss”, “3rd SPSP loss”, “2nd SPSP loss”, and “1st SPSP loss” (partially the same). As can be seen from the above, while the effects that are easy to be executed in the case of big hit and difficult to be executed in case of loss are high in the big hit reliability, the effects are difficult to be executed in case of big hit and easy to be executed in the case of loss are big hit reliability Low. In other words, "reach effect", "simulated sequence number 1 simulated sequence effect (pseudo 1 effect)", "pseudo sequence number 2 simulated sequence effects (pseudo 2 effect)", "SP reach effect", "pseudo The big hit reliability is high in the order of 3 times of simulated series production (pseudo 3 production), "4th SPSP reach production", "3rd SPSP reach production", "2nd SPSP reach production", and "1st SPSP reach production" Become. Also, from the viewpoint of the length of the fluctuation time, it can be seen that the effect that the jackpot reliability is higher is executed as the fluctuation time is longer.

[Variation pattern selection process in normal gaming state / second special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, determination of a variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-short time state) will be described using FIG. In step S408, the CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19 to determine a variation pattern. However, while the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19, the process of determining the variation pattern in FIG. It differs in that processing is performed to the second special symbol lottery using HT1-2 shown in FIG. Here, HT1-2 shown in FIG. 20 is that “the number of pending first special symbol lottery” has been replaced by “the number of pending second special symbol lottery” with respect to HT1-1 shown in FIG. It only differs. That is, while the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is taken into consideration in the process of determination of the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19, the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is considered in the process of determination of the variation pattern. Ru. In the non-time-short state, since the game ball is difficult to win in the second starting opening 22, it is rare that the second special symbol lottery is executed. For this reason, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the non-time-short state, a fluctuation pattern longer than that in the case where the first special symbol lottery is performed in the non-time-short state in order to suggest this rare feeling. May be selected easily. Specifically, for example, in HT1-2, the reach random number value range determined to be reachable is HT1 in each of the numbers of “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” with “losing” held. By setting the value to be larger than the corresponding part of −1, it may be possible to easily select a long-term fluctuation pattern as that which is more easily reachable than HT1-1.

[Time change game selection process in a short time game state / first special symbol lottery after one shot big hit]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 21, among the time-saving gaming states, determination of the variation pattern in the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the time-saving gaming state after single hit big hit (big hit B in FIG. 6). Will be explained. In step S408, the CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19 to determine a variation pattern. However, while the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19, the process of determining the variation pattern in FIG. It differs in that processing is performed to the first special symbol lottery using HT2-1 shown in FIG. Here, HT2-1 shown in FIG. 21 is related to the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery when “no reach” is selected by reach random number in “losing” for HT1-1 shown in FIG. The difference is that the variation pattern “13.50 seconds” (corresponding to the immediate loss) is uniformly selected.

[Time change game selection process in the short time game state / second special symbol lottery after one shot big hit]
Below, using FIG. 22, determination of the variation pattern in the case where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S 407 in the time saving game state after the single shot big hit (big hit B in FIG. 6) of the time saving game state. Will be explained. In step S408, the CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19 to determine a variation pattern. However, while the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19, the process of determining the variation pattern in FIG. It differs in that processing is performed to the second special symbol lottery using HT2-2 shown in FIG. Here, as shown in FIG. 22, “HT-2 shown in FIG. 19” replaces “HOLD number of first special symbol lottery” with “HOLD number of second special symbol lottery” with respect to HT1-1 shown in FIG. ing. That is, while the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery is taken into consideration in the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19, the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is considered in the process of determining the variation pattern. Ru. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, in HT 2-2, in the case of “No reach” selected by reach random number in the case of the number “1” of the second special symbol lottery hold in “losing”, fluctuation pattern “13” .50 seconds is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, in HT2-2, when no reach is selected by reach random number in the case of “2 to 4” in the number of reservations of the second special symbol lottery in “lost”, the fluctuation pattern random number value In the range "0 to 239", the variation pattern "2.00 seconds" is determined, and in the variation pattern random number range "240 to 269", the variation pattern "4.00 seconds" is determined, and the variation pattern random number range "270 to At 299 ", the fluctuation pattern" 10.00 seconds "is determined.

  Here, as described in the processing in steps S403 to S406, in the present embodiment, the suspension of the second special symbol lottery is digested prior to the suspension of the first special symbol lottery. Further, in the time saving state, as described in the processing in steps S5 and S7 of FIG. 13, since the electric tulip 27 is frequently opened for a long time and the gaming ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 22, the second Special symbol lottery is executed frequently and continuously. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the second special symbol lottery by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 22 is more than the first special symbol lottery by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 21 Also, the degree of profit when winning the lottery (big hit) is large. From this, conversely speaking, it can be said that if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the possibility of winning a jackpot having a small degree of profit of the player will increase. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to HT2-2 in FIG. 22, in the short time state after the single hit big hit, the number of reservations for the second special symbol lottery is 2 to 4 and the short is not reached. While making it easy to select time variation patterns (2.00 seconds, 4.00 seconds) and making the suspension of the second special symbol lottery be quickly digested, a game with a sense of speed is executed while the second If the number of reserved special symbol lottery is 1 and there is no reach, a long fluctuation pattern (13.50 seconds) must be selected to make it difficult for the player to execute the first special symbol lottery that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. There is. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to HT2-1 in FIG. 21, in the time-saving state after a single hit, even if the first special symbol lottery relatively disadvantageous to the player is executed. , In all of 1 to 4 of the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery, in the case of no reach, always select a long fluctuation pattern (13.50 seconds), the game ball wins the second starting opening 22 The player is controlled to earn time for the second special symbol lottery which is relatively advantageous to the player.

[Changed pattern selection process in short time game state / first, second special symbol lottery after sudden hit big hit]
The first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) in the process of step S407 in the time-saving game state after the big hit (C in FIG. 6) of the time-saving game state below, using FIG. The determination of the fluctuation pattern in the case where it is carried out will be described. The CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19 to determine the variation pattern. However, in the process of this variation pattern determination, while using HT3 shown in FIG. 23, the number of reservations for the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery), the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number do not depend on The fluctuation pattern is determined depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the number of revolutions during time saving) since the short time gaming state is started.

  Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit in the big hit determination processing of step S407, it is in the "big hit" portion of HT3. Then, the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) is determined in accordance with the hourly to mid-day rotational speed. That is, as shown in FIG. 23, in HT3, in the case of a "big hit" when the number of revolutions in time is "one time", the fluctuation pattern "68.00 seconds" is determined, and the number of revolutions in time is equal to In the case of "big hit" in the case of "2 to 6 times", the fluctuation pattern "60.00 seconds" is determined, and in the case of "big hit" in the case of "7 to 12 times" If the fluctuation pattern “48.00 seconds” is determined, and if the speed is “13 to 18 times” and the “big hit” is made, the fluctuation pattern “36.00 seconds” is determined. In the case of "big hit" in the case of "short hit" in the case of "short hit" in the case of "19-24 times", the variation pattern "24.00 seconds" is determined, and in the case of "25 to 30 times hit" in the case of "short hit". If it is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern “12 00 seconds "is determined. Thus, in HT3, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) to be determined becomes shorter as the number of revolutions in the time-to-midday increases. On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a loss in the big hit determination processing of step S407, time is short from the portion of “losing” of HT3. If the middle speed is "one time", the fluctuation pattern "9.50 seconds" is determined, and if the middle speed is "2 to 30 times", the fluctuation pattern "1.50 seconds" is determined. . Here, as shown in HT3, the variation patterns “68.00 seconds”, “60.00 seconds”, “48.00 seconds”, “36.00 seconds”, “24.00 seconds”, “12.00 Seconds, "9.50 seconds" and "1.50 seconds" respectively indicate the types of effect patterns of the notification effect "per first rotation", "per first measure", "per second measure", " It corresponds to "3rd scale hit", "4th scale hit", "5th scale hit", "1st rotation lost", and "short lost". In addition, these types of effect patterns are types of effect patterns to be executed in the short time gaming state after the impact big hit, and the details thereof will be described later, but the impact time to be executed in the time saving gaming state after the impact big hit It is a variation production of a decorative symbol of which the scale is adjusted such that the special production after the collision is executed for a specified time without interlocking with the rear special production.

[Change pattern selection process in probability variation gaming state]
In the following, when the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is executed in the process of step S407 in the probability variation gaming state after the continuous big hit (big hit A or big hit D in FIG. 6) using FIG. The determination of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. The CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the process of determining the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 19 to determine the variation pattern. However, in the process of determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined depending only on the big hit or the loss using HT4 shown in FIG.

  Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit in the big hit determination processing of step S407, the variation corresponding to the “big hit” of HT4. If the pattern “4.50” seconds is determined, and it is determined that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a loss in the big hit determination process of step S407, then it is a “losing” of HT4. Determine the corresponding fluctuation pattern "0.50" seconds. Here, as shown in HT3, the fluctuation patterns “4.50 seconds” and “0.50 seconds” correspond to the types “short hit” and “very short loss” of the effect pattern of the informing effect, respectively. In addition, these types of effect patterns are types of effect patterns to be executed in the probability variation gaming state after the continuous big hit, the details of which will be described later, but the selection effects to be executed in the probability variation gaming state (selected by the player It is a change effect that the decoration pattern changes and is displayed only for a fixed time without being interlocked with a possible effect).

  As described above, the information on the variation pattern determined in step S408 (that is, the execution time of the notification effect: can also be referred to as the information of the type of the effect pattern of the notification effect) is set in the RAM 103 as setting information. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, the CPU 101 generates a notification effect start command including the setting information set by the jackpot determination process of step S407 and the setting information set by the variation pattern selection process of step S408, and sets it in the RAM 103. Here, the notification effect start command is a command for instructing the effect control unit 400 to start the notification effect by the image display unit 6, the speaker 35, and the like. The setting information included in the notification effect start command also includes information indicating which of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Further, the CPU 101 sets a game state notification command indicating the current game state (for example, a probability change game state) in the RAM 103. The above-described notification effect start command and the game state notification command are transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S410.

  In step S410, the CPU 101 changes the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b based on the setting information included in the notification effect start command set in the process of step S409. Start the display. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S411.

  In step S411, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process of step S408 has passed from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol in step S410. If the determination in step S411 is YES, the process proceeds to step S412. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) of FIG.

  In step S412, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a notification effect stop command (design determination command) instructing the end of the notification effect by the image display unit 6 or the like. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S413. The notification effect stop command set in step S412 is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG.

  In step S413, the CPU 101 ends the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b started in the process of step S410. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is ended by the processing of this step S413, thereafter, the determination symbol representing the determination result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed for a defined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S414.

  In step S414, the CPU 101 executes the in-stop process. Here, the in-stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the process during stop of step S414 in FIG.

  First, in step S4141 in FIG. 25, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit in the big hit determination process in step S407 in FIG. . If the determination in step S4141 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4142, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4144.

  In step S4142, the CPU 101 instructs the effect control unit 400 to start the big hit game effect and information indicating the type of big hit game effect to be started (which is the big hit game effect based on which of the big hit A to D) An opening command to be included is set in the RAM 103. In this opening command, when the defined time (0.5 seconds) elapses after the stop processing of step S414 is started (after the processing of step S413 is completed), the process of step S9 of FIG. 13 is performed. The output processing is transmitted to the effect control unit 400, whereby a big hit game effect is started. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4143.

  In step S4143, the CPU 101 sets the gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the high probability flag, the normal short time flag, and the special short time flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”, and sets the big hit gaming flag to “ON”. Here, the big hit game flag is shown to be in the big hit game by being set to "ON", and is set to "OFF" by the processing of step S624 in FIG. 27 described later, the end of the big hit game Is shown. In the process of step S4143, the above-described various flags indicate that the defined determination time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the process under stop of step S414 is started (after the process of step S413 is completed). Then it is set. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the gaming state is controlled in the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4144.

  In step S4144, the CPU 101 determines whether the high-probability flag stored in the RAM 103 is "ON". If the determination in step S4144 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4145. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4148.

  In step S4145, the CPU 101 rewrites the value of S stored in the RAM 103 into a value obtained by subtracting one. Here, S is the remaining number of executions (remaining number of times) of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the high certainty state, and the game control in the high certainty state that the value of S is “0” Indicates that the game is not controlled (ie, the game is controlled in a low certainty state). When the high probability flag is set to "ON", the specified number of times ("9999" in this embodiment) is set as the value of this S by the process of step S6252 in FIG. 29 described later. The process of step S4145 indicates that the number of remaining special symbol lottery in which the special symbol lottery is executed once and the game is controlled in the high certainty state is reduced by one. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4146.

  In step S4146, CPU 101 determines whether the value of S stored in RAM 103 (subtracted by the process of step S4145) is “0”, that is, the special symbol lottery of this time is controlled with high certainty. It is determined whether it was the last special symbol lottery. If the determination in step S4146 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4147. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4148. By the way, the fact that the determination in step S4146 is YES means that the process in step S4145 is performed 9999 times when the high probability flag is "ON" (that is, when the game is controlled in the high probability state) It means that it has been done (that is, the special symbol lottery has been continuously performed 9999 times). However, in the high certainty state, since it is normal to win a big hit before the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times, practically, it is not determined as YES in the processing of step S4146.

  In step S4147, the CPU 101 sets the gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the high probability flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”. In the process of step S4147, the above-mentioned high probability flag has a defined fixed time (0.5 seconds) after the process under stop of step S414 is started (after the process of step S413 is completed). When it passes, it is set to "OFF". Thereby, when the next special symbol lottery is started, the gaming state is controlled in a low certainty state, and the variation pattern table to be set is from HT4 to HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3 Switch to one of the Specifically, when the normal short time flag is ON, it switches to HT2-1 or HT2-2. When the special short time flag is ON, it switches to HT3. When the normal short time flag and the special short time flag are both OFF, HT1-1 Or switches to HT1-2. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4148.

  In step S4148, the CPU 101 determines whether the normal short time flag or the special short time flag stored in the RAM 103 is "ON". If the determination in step S4148 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4149. If the determination is NO, the in-stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG.

  In step S4149, the CPU 101 rewrites the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. Here, J is the remaining number of executions (remaining number of times) of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the time saving state (power support state), and it is no longer time saving state that the value of J is "0" The power support state indicates that the game is not controlled (that is, the game is controlled in the non-time-short state (non-power support state)). It should be noted that the value of J is set a prescribed number of times (when the short time normal flag is set to “ON” or the special time short flag is set to “ON” by the processing of step S6253 or step S6255 or step S6257 of FIG. In the present embodiment, “9999”, “100” or “30” is set. By the process of step S4149, it is shown that the number of remaining times of the special symbol lottery where the special symbol lottery is executed once and the game is controlled in the time saving state (power support state) is reduced by one. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4150.

  In step S4150, CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of J stored in RAM 103 (subtracted by the process of step S4149) is "0", that is, the current special symbol lottery is in a short time state (power support state Determine whether it was the last special symbol lottery controlled by). If the determination in step S4150 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4151. If the determination is NO, the in-stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) of FIG.

  In step S4151, the CPU 101 sets the gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets a flag set to “ON” among the normal time short flag and the special time short flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”. In the process of step S4151, the normal short time flag or the special time short flag described above is subjected to the process under step S414 (after the process of step S413 is completed), and then the defined time (0 .. When 5 seconds have passed, it is set to "OFF". Thereby, when the next special symbol lottery is started, the gaming state is controlled in the non-time-short state (non-power-supply state), and the set fluctuation pattern table is the current table (HT4, HT2-1, HT2-2 , HT3) to HT1-1 or HT1-2. Then, the in-stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG.

  Description returns to FIG. 17. In step S415, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a customer wait command and a gaming state notification command indicating the current gaming state have already been transmitted in the process of step 416 (described later). . Here, with the customer waiting command, when the defined time (0.5 seconds) has passed since the process of step S414 was started (in other words, the variation display of the special symbol is ended in the process of step S413) The command is sent when there is no suspension of the special symbol lottery at the time when 0.5 seconds have passed since the state where the notification effect of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not executed (hereinafter, customer waiting It is a command to notify that it has become a state). If the determination in step S415 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) of FIG. 13, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S416.

  In step S416, the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command and a gaming state notification command in the RAM 103. The customer waiting command and the game state notification command are transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. 13, and based on the customer waiting command, a predetermined stop effect (for example, effect of decorative symbol stop display) starts Be done. In addition, customer waiting presentation is started when predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) passes after the above-mentioned stop production is started. Here, the customer waiting effect is, for example, an effect that causes the image display unit 6 to display an image related to a content (an animation, a story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1, or, for example, a predetermined effect that is executed during the game For example, a part of reach effect is displayed on the image display unit 6. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol processing) of FIG.

[Big winning opening process]
26 to 29 are an example of a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. Hereinafter, the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in step S601, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether the state of the gaming machine 1 is in a big hit game based on the information (big hit game flag) stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S601 is YES, the process proceeds to step S602. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S602, based on the information stored in the RAM 103, the CPU 101 determines whether the state of the gaming machine 1 is in the opening effect of the big hit game. If the determination in step S602 is YES, the process proceeds to step S603, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S609.

  In step S603, the CPU 101 determines whether a set opening time defining an execution time of the opening effect has passed. If the determination in step S603 is YES, the process proceeds to step S604. If the determination is NO, the opening effect has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S 604, the CPU 101 sets the operation pattern and the like of all round numbers Rmax of the big hit game, the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, and the V-shaped 52 and sets the setting information in the RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 is the first big winning opening 23, the second big winning opening 51, and the V-Hane 52 in the big hit game to be executed this time among the big hit games based on the big hit A to D described with reference to FIG. The operation pattern etc. is set, and the setting information is set in the RAM 103. By the process of step S604, the total round number Rmax of the big hit game, the interval time between the round in the big hit game, the set ending time which is the time to perform the ending effect at the end of the big hit game, etc. are set. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, the CPU 101 resets the winning number C of the game balls to the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 stored in the RAM 103 to "0". Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the CPU 101 updates the number R of rounds of the big hit game stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding one. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S607.

  In step S 607, the CPU 101 starts open control of the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51. Specifically, when the value of R stored in the RAM 103 is not "8", the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 115 is controlled to start the opening control of the first large winning opening 23, while the R When the value of is “8” (that is, V long round game or V short round game), the second big winning opening opening and closing unit 118 is controlled to start the opening control of the second big winning opening 51. As a result of this processing, the round of the big hit game (round game) is started, and the opening operation (one opening operation) of the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S608, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a round start notification command for notifying a round start (round game start). The round start notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. 13, and the round effect is started. The round start notification command includes information indicating the total number of rounds Rmax set in step S604 and information indicating the current round number R updated by the process of step S606. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S613.

  In step S609, the CPU 101 determines, based on the information stored in the RAM 103, whether or not the state of the gaming machine 1 is in a big hit gaming interval. If the determination in step S609 is YES, the process proceeds to step S610, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S610, whether or not the set interval time during the big hit game set in the process of step S604 has passed from the time when the first large winning opening 23 is closed at the end of the previous round during the big hit game Determine If the determination in step S610 is YES, it is time to start the next round in the big hit game, so the process proceeds to step S605, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S611, the CPU 101 determines, based on the information stored in the RAM 103, whether the state of the gaming machine 1 is in execution of the ending effect of the big hit game. If the determination in step S611 is YES, the process proceeds to step S623 in FIG. 25, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S612, the CPU 101 executes V area opening / closing processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the V area opening / closing process will be described. FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the V area opening / closing process of step S612 in FIG.

  First, in step S6121 in FIG. 28, the CPU 101 determines the specified time until the V area 53 set in the process in step S604 is released after the second large winning opening 51 is opened in step S607 (FIG. 7, It is determined whether or not 3 seconds shown in FIG. 8 has elapsed. If the determination in step S6121 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6122, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S6125.

  In step S6122, the CPU 101 controls the V area switching unit 120 to start open control of the V area 53. By this processing, the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening 51 (in the case of the continuous big hit) will pass the V area 53. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S6123.

  In step S6123, the CPU 101 starts the release control of the V area 53 in step S6122, and then a prescribed time for closing the V area 53 set in the process of step S604 (8 seconds shown in FIGS. 7 and 8). It is determined whether or not one second has passed. If the determination in step S6123 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6124. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S6125.

  In step S6124, the CPU 101 controls the V area switching unit 120 to close the V area 53. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S6125.

  In step S6125, the CPU 101 determines, in accordance with the detection signal from the V area switch 119, whether the gaming ball has passed through the V area 53 or not. If the determination in step S6125 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6126. If the determination is NO, the V region opening / closing process ends, and the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG.

  In step S6126, the CPU 101 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the V area 53, and sets, in the RAM 103, a V area passing command for notifying the effect control unit 400 that the gaming ball has passed through the V area 53. . Thereafter, the V region opening / closing process ends, and the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG. Note that the V area passage command set in step S6126 is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG.

  26, the description returns to FIG. 26. In step S613, the CPU 101 controls the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 based on the output signal from the first large winning opening switch 114 or the second large winning opening switch 117. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize. If the determination in step S613 is YES, the process proceeds to step S614, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S615.

  In step S614, the CPU 101 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 has been detected, and adds 1 to the number C of winning of the gaming ball stored in the RAM 103. Update to the same value. The process of step S614 is executed each time the game ball wins the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51, whereby the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening during one round. The total number of game balls (winning number C) winning in 51 is accumulated and stored in the RAM 103. In addition, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a winning command for notifying the effect control unit 400 that the gaming ball has won the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51. This winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. 13, so that the effect control unit 400 causes the game ball to be in the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening during one round. Every time winning 51, the number C of winnings (that is, the number of winnings in one round) is notified, and based on the notification information, the winning processing instruction of step S125 in FIG. 35 is executed. It will be done. In addition, winning of the game ball to the 1st large winning a prize opening 23 or the 2nd large winning a prize opening 51 is effective during the large winning a prize opening period which is provided during the round and immediately after the round (that is, it is normal winning) The prize commands which are regarded as described above are transmitted when the game ball is detected to be prized in the period considered to be effective. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S615.

  In step S615, the CPU 101 determines, based on the information stored in the RAM 103, whether or not the state of the gaming machine 1 is in execution of a round effect of a big hit game. If the determination in step S615 is YES, the process proceeds to step S616. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S616, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined opening control time has elapsed since the opening control of the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 was started in the process of step S607. Specifically, in the case of a continuous big hit, the CPU 101 determines whether or not an open control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed with respect to the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51. On the other hand, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed for the first large winning opening 23 in the case of a single-shot big hit, and 0. 0 for the second large winning opening 51. It is determined whether the release control time of one second has elapsed. Further, in the case of a big hit at the time of a collision, the CPU 101 determines whether or not an open control time of 0.1 second has elapsed with respect to the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51. If the determination in step S616 is YES, the process proceeds to step S618, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S617.

  In step S617, the CPU 101 sets the upper limit game ball number Cmax (in this embodiment, the upper limit game ball number Cmax) defining the timing at which the number of winning balls C of the game ball in this round is the first large winning opening 23 or the second large winning opening 51 closed. It is determined whether "10" has been reached. If the determination in step S617 is YES, the process proceeds to step S618. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S618, when the first big winning opening 23 is opened, the CPU 101 controls the first big winning opening opening / closing unit 115 to control the opening of the first big winning opening 23 started in step S607. When the second big winning opening 51 is opened, the second big winning opening opening and closing unit 118 is controlled to end the opening control of the second big winning opening 51 started in step S 607. . That is, the big winning opening opened in step S 607 is closed to end the current round. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S619.

  In step S619, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, a round end notification command for notifying of the round end (round game end). The round end notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 of FIG. 13, and the round effect is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S620.

  In step S620, the CPU 101 determines whether the current round number R stored in the RAM 103 has reached the maximum round number Rmax of the big hit game set in the process of step S604. If the determination in step S620 is YES, the process proceeds to step S621 in FIG. 27, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S621 in FIG. 27, the CPU 101 resets the number of rounds R stored in the RAM 103 to “0”. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S622.

  In step S 622, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, an ending command for instructing the effect control unit 400 to execute the ending effect of the big hit game. The ending command set in this process is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 in step S9 (output process) of FIG. As the ending command, a command corresponding to the jackpot symbol and the gaming state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is transmitted, and the effect control unit 400, after the ending effect is ended based on the ending command (big hit game effect end Control the production of after). Specifically, if it is an ending command corresponding to a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot (for example, jackpot A or jackpot D shown in FIG. 6) controlled in a jackpot game state after a jackpot, the jackpot game state after the jackpot game is over An ending command indicating that the game is to be controlled is transmitted, and the effect control unit 400 executes the effect of the effect mode indicating the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game effect based on the ending command. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S623.

  In step S623, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time set in the process of step S604 in FIG. 26 has elapsed since the ending command was set in the RAM 103 in step S622. If the determination in step S623 is YES, the process proceeds to step S624, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG.

  In step S624, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot game that was being executed. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the big hit game flag stored in the RAM 103 to OFF, and ends the big hit game. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S625.

  In step S625, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process. Here, with reference to FIG. 29, this gaming state setting process will be described. FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the gaming state setting process of step S625 of FIG.

  First, in step S6251 of FIG. 29, the CPU 101 determines whether or not passage of V area 53 of one or more gaming balls is detected in step S6125 of FIG. 28 in the present big hit game. If the determination in step S6251 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6252, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S6256.

  In step S6252, the CPU 101 sets the high probability flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON", and sets the value of S stored in the RAM 103 to "9999". In addition, as mentioned above, S shows the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the high certainty state. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S6253.

  In step S6253, the CPU 101 sets the normal short time flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON", and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to "9999". In addition, as mentioned above, J shows the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the time saving state (power support state). Then, the gaming state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S6254, the CPU 101 determines whether the game ended in step S624 in FIG. 27 is a big hit game based on the continuous big hit (big hit A or big hit D). That is, it is determined whether the gaming ball has not passed the V area 53 in the continuous big hit, or whether the gaming ball has not passed the V area 53 in the big hit that is not the continuous big hit. If the determination in step S6254 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6255. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S6256.

  In step S6255, the CPU 101 sets the normal short time flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON", and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to "100". Then, the gaming state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  In step S6256, the CPU 101 determines whether the game ended in step S624 in FIG. 27 is a big hit game based on a big hit (big hit C). If the determination in step S6256 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6257. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S6255.

  In step S6257, the CPU 101 sets the special short time flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON", and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to "30". Then, the gaming state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) of FIG.

  As described above, when the gaming ball passes the V area 53, it is set to the probability variation gaming state until the gaming state after the big hit wins the special symbol lottery next time (more precisely, the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times) (Steps S6252 and S6253). On the other hand, when the gaming ball has not passed the V area 53, if it is a continuous big hit or a single shot big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled in the time-saving gaming state up to the 100th rotation (step S6255). If it is a big hit at the time of the crash, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled in the short time gaming state up to the 30th rotation (step S6257). In the present embodiment, when the V region 53 is not passed, the number of time reductions (the value of J) is set the same for continuous big hit and single shot big hit, but in the case of continuous big hit, single shot big hit The number of times may be set more than in the case. This is preferable for the following reasons. That is, in the continuous big hit, as described above, since the V long round game in which the game ball can pass through the V area 53 is executed, it is normal that the game is controlled in the probability change gaming state after the big hit, Therefore, when the game ball does not pass through the V area 53, if it is not possible to acquire an advantageous gaming state (probable variation gaming state), it is impossible to receive a profit that can be originally acquired. Therefore, in such a case, it is decided to give more time-savings than a one-time big hit that the game is not controlled in a probability change gaming state after a big hit by the V short round game being executed. Remedies can be taken.

  This is the end of the description of the processing of the main control unit 100 described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control unit]
FIGS. 30, 31, and 34 to 38 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process performed by the effect control unit 400. The timer interrupt process performed by the effect control unit 400 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. The effect control unit 400 performs a series of processes shown in FIG. 30, FIG. 31, and FIG. 34 to FIG. 38 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power on and power off. Repeatedly) every time. The processing performed by the effect control unit 400 is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 402.

  In step S10 of FIG. 30, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 sets an effect (hereinafter referred to as an RTC effect) according to the date and time (time) measured by the RTC 404, and sets the set RTC effect as the image sound control unit 500 The RTC effect control process of setting various commands for instructing execution to the RAM 403 is executed. The RTC effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S11, the CPU 401 receives various commands output from the main control unit 100 by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 13, sets the effect contents according to the received commands, and sets the effect contents The command reception processing is performed to set various commands in the RAM 403 for instructing the image and sound control unit 500 and the like to execute the effects of the above. The command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  Next, in step S12, the CPU 401 performs an output process of outputting various commands set in the RAM 403 in the processes of steps S10 and S11 to the image sound control unit 500 and the like. According to this process, various effects determined in the processes of step S10 and step S11 are executed on the image display unit 6, the speaker 35, the board lamp 8 and the like by execution control of the image and sound control unit 500 and the like. Become.

  Note that the CPU 401 performs random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers used for effects every time the timer interrupt processing described above is executed. Also in this random number updating process, as in the random number updating process in step S1 of FIG. 13, a loop counter is typically used, and the count value (updated random number value) is set to the maximum value (for example, 99). After reaching, it returns to 0 again (that is, it circulates). In addition, in this random number updating process, each counter of the effect random numbers randomly updates the initial value (the value serving as the starting point of the circulation) when it circulates once. By this, it is possible to prevent the counter value (count value) from being synchronized among these effect random numbers.

[RTC production control processing]
FIG. 31 is an example of a detailed flowchart of an RTC effect control process of step S10 of FIG. The RTC effect control process of step S10 of FIG. 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, three types of effects of a first RTC effect, a second RTC effect, and a replacement effect are executed as RTC effects according to the date and time (time) measured by the RTC 404. Here, the first RTC effect is a predetermined first set time (for example, every hour of 10:00 to 22:00 on each day; that is, 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, ... 22 : 00) and the latest theater production described later is performed for a specified time. The second RTC effect is predetermined second setting time (for example, every hour of 10:30 to 22:30 of each day; that is, 10:30, 11:30, 12:30, ..., 22:30 The game effect to be described later is executed for a specified time. The replacement effect is a predetermined third set time (effect update timing defined for each day of the week shown in (2) of FIG. 32 described later; in other words, Monday to Friday 20:00, Saturday and Sunday 11:00 , 14:00, 17:00, 20:00), which indicates that a part of the theater effect described later is updated to the latest one. Although the third set time is included in the first set time, when the third set time is reached, the exchange effect is given priority, and in this case, the first RTC effect is not performed. Further, as described above, in the plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island in the pachinko hall, the time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. Therefore, by making the setting times of the first setting time, the second setting time, and the third setting time the same among the plurality of gaming machines 1, it is possible to simultaneously start RTC effects in all the gaming machines 1. Can.

  First, in step S101, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether it is the start timing of the exchange effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the third set time). If the determination in step S101 is YES, the process proceeds to step S102, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S102, the CPU 401 performs phase update processing, and then the processing proceeds to step S103. Here, this phase update processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Phase update process]
First, with reference to FIG. 32 (1), theatrical effects and their categories in the present embodiment will be described. Although the details will be clarified by the following description, in the present embodiment, as one of the game effects performed as the game progresses, the theater effects of four categories (categories A to D) are performed in various scenes. Be done. In addition, a plurality of theatrical effects are prepared as theatrical effect of each category. Specifically, theatrical effect of category A is 120, that of category B is 144, that of category C is 24 and that of category D The theater productions 24 are prepared, and all of these theater performances are stored in the ROM 502. Note that these theater effects are effects each having an effect scale (length) of 60 seconds in total length. Also, in the following, by describing the alphabet and numbers with a hyphen, as in "A-3", the alphabet indicates a category, and the numbers indicate which number of theatrical effects among theatrical effects within the category. Shall be indicated. Therefore, for example, "A-3" indicates "the third theater rendition of category A".

  As described above, although all the play effects are stored in the ROM 502, the play effects that can be actually used as the game effects (that is, executable) are the execution timings of the exchange effects (that is, the third It is updated one by one at the arrival timing of the set time (replacement update or additional update, which will be described in detail later). Specifically, in the present embodiment, in order to identify feasible theater rendition, a phase represented by a number is defined for each category, and the number of this phase is updated to the latest (executable Show the number of the stage production in the category. That is, when the phase of category A is 7, it indicates that theatrical production of "A-7" has become most recently executable. In addition, in this embodiment, although the phase 0 shall show the initial state which can not perform any theater production, the phase 0 is the same as the phase 1, and the 1st presentation in each category is carried out. May be feasible. Then, in the present embodiment, by adding and updating the phase one by one at the timing defined for each category, the executable theater effect will change. The details will be described below.

  First, with reference to (2) of FIG. 32, the timing of phase update for each category (that is, the timing of update of theatrical performance) will be described. In the present embodiment, the phase of each category is updated at the timing when the replacement effect is executed (that is, the timing when the third set time arrives). Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 32, the exchange effect is from 10:00 on Monday to Friday, 11:00 to 14:00, 17:00 to 20 on Saturday and Sunday in one week. Of this phase of Category A is performed on Tuesday: 20:00 on Tuesday, 20:00 on Thursday, 11:00 on Saturday, 17:00 on Saturday, 14:00 on Sunday. The category B phase is updated on Monday by 20:00, 12:00 on Wednesday, 20:00 on Friday, 14:00 on Saturday, 11:00 on Sunday, and 17 on Sunday. The phase of Category C is updated by 1 at 20:00 on Saturday in 1 week, and the phase of Category D is updated by 1 at 20:00 on Sunday of 1 week. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the date and time when the phase is updated differs depending on the category, the category of the theater effect updated varies depending on the date and time. Then, when one week passes, the phase of category A is updated by 5 addition, the phase of category B is updated by 6 addition, and the phases of categories C and D are updated by 1 addition. Therefore, after 24 weeks, the phase of Category A is updated to 5 × 24 = 120, the phase of Category B is updated to 6 × 24 = 144, and the phase of Categories C and D is updated to 1 × 24 = 24. And the last play "A-120", "B-144", "C-24", and "D-24" in each category become executable.

  Next, an example of the phase update will be described with reference to (3) of FIG. Now, the game machine 1 is installed in the hall at 9:00 am on Monday morning and the operation is started, and the phase of Category A is 4 at 12:00 on Sunday of the 7th day after operation, and the phase of Category B is It is assumed that the phase of Category C is 1 and the phase of Category D is 0. At this time, the phase of category A is updated from 4 to 5 because the phase of category A is updated (see (2) in FIG. 32) at 14:00 on Sunday, the seventh day after operation. Similarly, at 17:00 on the 7th Sunday after operation, the phase of Category B is updated from 5 to 6 and at 20:00 on the 7th Sunday after operation, the phase of Category D is 0. Is updated from 1 to 20:00 on Monday, the eighth day after operation, and the phase of Category B is updated from 6 to 7 at 20:00 on the ninth day after operation. Phase A of Category A Is updated from 5 to 6. Then, the CPU 401 stores the phase of each category updated in this manner in the RAM 403, and based on the phase, executes the rendering instruction to the image sound control unit 500 to play in each category stored in the ROM 502. Of the effects, it is specified which of the effects is executable. When the sales of the hall is finished and the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the stored information in the RAM 403 is lost, but the next day when the sales of the hall is started, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is When the supply is started, the phase of each category is reset in the RAM 403 based on the time indicated by the RTC 404 when the power supply is resumed. Specifically, for example, when the power supply is resumed at 9:00 on the eighth day of Monday after operation, the CPU 401 selects the seventh day after operation which is the latest phase update timing based on the time of day. Set the phase state of Sunday at 20:00 (that is, as shown in (3) of FIG. 32), the phase of the category A is 5, the phase of the category B is 6, and the phase of the categories C and D is 1 in the RAM 403 . Further, the information of the phase may be stored in the memory in the RTC 404 or may be stored in the non-volatile RAM 504 so that the information of the current phase is not lost even if the power is shut off.

  Next, with reference to (4) and (5) of FIG. 32, the update of the theater effect that can be performed based on the phase update will be described. Note that, in the present embodiment, there are two drama updates, that is, a replacement update in which the play effects that can be executed by the phase update are replaced, and an addition update in which the play effects that are executable by the phase update are added. Also, in the following description, the effect set as the play effect that can be executed by the exchange update is referred to as an exchange update effect, and the effect set as an executable play effect by the additional update is referred to as an additional update effect .

  First, with reference to (4) of FIG. 32, replacement updating of the theater effect will be described. In the present embodiment, only the theater effect of category A is replaced and updated, and is set as a replacement update effect. Specifically, as the replacement update effect, a play effect is set in which the upper limit is five in the order of the newly performed play effect. For example, when the phase of category A is updated to 4, four theater effects "A-4", "A-3", "A-2" and "A-1" are set as replacement update effects, and the category When the A phase is updated to 5, five theater effects of “A-5”, “A-4”, “A-3”, “A-2” and “A-1” are set as replacement update effects. When the phase of category A is updated to 6, five theater effects of "A-6", "A-5", "A-4", "A-3" and "A-2" are interchanged. Thereafter, the five theater effects are set as replacement effects in the order of the newly performed theater effects (see the shaded area in (4) in FIG. 32). The phase will be updated even if it exceeds 24 weeks after operation, but if the phase of Category A is updated more than 120, the number of remainders when dividing the phase by 120 will be the new phase The phase is loop-updated from 1 to 120 by assuming that the phase is 120 if the remainder is 0. Therefore, for example, when the phase is updated to 122, the phase is considered to be 2, and "A-2" becomes the latest stage of the theater effect that can be executed. Five theater effects of “A-2”, “A-1”, “A-120”, “A-119”, and “A-118” are set in the order of possible theater effects.

  Next, with reference to (5) of FIG. 32, the additional update of the theater effect will be described. In the present embodiment, theatrical effects of all the categories A to D are additionally updated and set as additional update effects. Specifically, as the additional update effect, all the theater effects that have been made executable so far are set. For example, when the phase of category A is updated to 6, since "A-6" becomes theatrical performance that can be executed most recently, "A-1" to "A-6" updated so far All the drama effects of are set as additional update effects, and when the phase is updated to 7, "A-7" is additionally set as additional update effects (hatched portion in (5) of FIG. 32) reference). Further, similarly, the additional update effect is updated and set according to the update of the phase in the theater effects of the categories B to D, so, for example, the 20th Tuesday of the ninth day after operation shown in (3) of FIG. In 00, the phase of category A is 6, the phase of category B is 7, the phase of category C is 1, and the phase of category D is 1 (one setting). Theatrical effects of 1 "to" A-6 "," B-1 "to" B-7 "," C-1 ", and" D-1 "are set. In addition, each phase is updated even if it exceeds 24 weeks after the operation, but even if the phase of Category A is updated over 120, the additional update effect does not change any more, and similarly, Category B Even if the phases C, D, and D are updated over 144, 24, and 24, respectively, the additional update effects do not change any further, and all the theater effects of all categories are set as additional update effects. It will be

  As described above, the CPU 401 performs the phase update process to update the phase of each category to the RAM 403, and based on the phase, executes the rendering instruction to the image sound control unit 500 to store the play stored in the ROM 502. Among the effects, theater effects of up to five categories A that can be executed as replacement update effects and theater effects of categories A to D that can be executed as additional update effects are specified. In addition, although the details will be described later, a theater effect that can be executed as the replacement update effect specified in this way is used as a reach effect (selected play reach effect or partial play reach effect) under specific conditions, and as an additional update effect Executable theater effects are used as selection effects selectable by the player described later. Therefore, the reach effect is updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, and the selection effect selectable by the player is also updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404.

  In the above-described phase update, it becomes an object by determining whether or not the first set time, the second set time, and the third set time have come based on the time information measured by the RTC 404 of the gaming machine 1 It is intended to update the phase of the category. However, the present invention is not limited to the example of updating the phase based on the time information, for example, the time that has elapsed since the game machine was turned on along with the opening of the hall business (that is, The phase of the target category may be updated according to the elapsed time after operation to execute each RTC effect. In this case, by simultaneously turning on the power supplies of a plurality of game machines 1 installed on one island shown in FIG. 9, it is possible to synchronize the time elapsed since the power was turned on. Therefore, it becomes possible to start RTC rendering all over one island simultaneously. And, in this case, since it is possible to change the timing of turning on the power depending on the hole, it is possible to change the time when the RTC effect is performed for each hole.

  The description returns to FIG. 31. In step S103, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to start the exchange effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S104, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the first RTC effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the first set time). If the determination in step S104 is YES, the process proceeds to step S105, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S105, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to start the first RTC effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S106, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether it is the start timing of the second RTC effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the second set time). If the determination in step S106 is YES, the process proceeds to step S107, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S109.

  In step S107, the CPU 401 determines whether or not an effect capable gaming state is established. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the gaming state which can be rendered will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, three types of effects of exchange effect, first RTC effect, and second RTC effect are executed as RTC effects, but the exchange effect and first RTC effect are games at the start time of the RTC effect. While it is possible to execute regardless of the state, it is determined whether or not the second RTC effect can be performed according to the gaming state at the RTC effect start timing (that is, at the second set time). Specifically, if the gaming state is any of the short time gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the big hit gaming state at the start timing (second set time) of the second RTC effect, the gaming state is not executable. If it is determined that there is (that is, the second RTC effect is not executed) and the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state at the start timing (second set time) of the second RTC effect, execution It is determined that the game is possible (ie, the second RTC effect is executed). If the determination in step S107 is YES, the process proceeds to step S108. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S11 of FIG.

  In step S108, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to start the second RTC effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S109, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the RTC effect (the first RTC effect, the second RTC effect, or the exchange effect). Specifically, the CPU 401 determines, as the end timing of the first RTC effect and the replacement effect, whether or not two minutes have passed from the start time of these effects, and as the end timing of the second RTC effect, the second RTC effect. It is determined whether two minutes have passed since the start time of the second time, or whether a notification effect (variation effect) for notifying a big hit during the execution of the second RTC effect is performed. That is, the first RTC effect and the replacement effect are determined to be the end timing when 2 minutes have passed from the start time, and the second RTC effect has a variation that reports a big hit after 2 minutes have passed from the start time or is started. When the effect is executed, it is determined that the end timing is reached. If the determination in step S109 is YES, the process proceeds to step S110. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S11 of FIG.

  In step S110, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to end the RTC effect being executed. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like in the above-described steps S103, S105, S108, and S110 is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Further, when the CPU 401 instructs execution of the RTC effect in steps S103, S105, and 108, the flag during RTC effect instruction is set to ON and stored in the RAM 403, and when the instruction to end the RTC effect is performed in step S110, the RTC During production instruction flag is set to OFF. Here, the RTC effect instruction in progress flag is a flag indicating that the RTC effect is in effect by being set to ON. Further, although an RTC effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. It may be started at the start timing of the screen, but it may be wiped (displayed in the wipe area 6w shown in (1A) of FIG. 62 as described in detail later), and the second RTC effect is translucent under specific conditions It may be displayed.

[Command reception process]
FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are an example of a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S11 of FIG. The command reception processing of step S11 of FIG. 30 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  First, in step S111, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether a hold increase command (first hold number increase command or second hold number increase command) has been received from the main control unit 100 (FIG. 16). Steps S206 and S212). If the determination in step S111 is YES, the process proceeds to step S112. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S112, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 in accordance with the hold increase command received in the process of step S111 to perform an additional display process of a hold image indicating hold of the special symbol lottery on the image display unit 6 or And performing a pending image display process of changing the pending image to the prefetch display mode. The displayed reserved images are erased in order when the notification effect is started based on the process of step S115 described later. Further, the instruction to the image sound control unit 500 is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. In addition, when the CPU 401 receives the first hold number increase command, the CPU 403 causes the data indicating the hold of the first special symbol lottery (hold data) to be accumulated and stored one by time in chronological order in the RAM 403, while the second hold number When the increase command is received, data (hold data) indicating the hold of the second special symbol lottery is accumulated and stored one by one in chronological order in the RAM 403. Also, at that time, the CPU 401 extracts the prior determination information included in the hold increase command, includes it in each hold data described above, and stores it in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S113, the CPU 401 performs pre-reading advance notice effect setting processing. Specifically, when the number of pending special symbol lottery (number of pending data) stored in the RAM 403 is two or more, including the pending added in step S112, the CPU 401 is most recently stored in the RAM 403. Based on the prior determination information (that is, included in the latest hold data), it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to execute preview advance notice effects. For example, when the pre-judgment information indicates “big hit”, the CPU 401 indicates “lost” and “with reach effect” (reach with loss), or “missing” and “reach effect” In each of the cases indicating “none” (no reach), the prefetch random number is acquired, and when the prefetch random number matches a predetermined prefetch winning value, it is decided to execute the prefetch advance notice effect. It should be noted that different numbers may be set for the pre-read winning value, when the prior determination information is “big hit”, “reach with loss”, and “reach without loss”. Specifically, by setting the number of prefetched winning values in the case of "big hit" to be greater than the number of prefetched winning values in the case of "reach with loss", it is easy to perform previewing notice effect at the time of "big hit" It is good also as things. Then, when it is determined that the advance notice advance effect is to be executed, the CPU 401 performs the advance notice to be executed by lottery or the like from the pattern of a large number of advance notice effect effects satisfying the conditions of this prior determination information (conditions of whether or not a big hit). Set the content of the effect. That is, as pre-read advance notice effects, it is set what kind of notice effects are to be performed in each notice effect. In addition, prefetch notice production is a notice production which suggests the possibility of big hit over a plurality of notice productions, for example. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S114, the CPU 401 determines whether the notification effect start command and the game state notification command set in step S409 in FIG. 17 have been received. If the determination in step S114 is YES, the process proceeds to step S115. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S115, the CPU 401 sets the effect contents of the informing effect by the image display unit 6 or the like according to the informing effect start command received in the process of step S114, and executes the informing effect of the set contents A notification effect setting process to instruct 500 to start is performed. Here, the notification effect (variation effect) is an effect that is executed on the image display unit 6 or the like according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol and suggests the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, the decoration symbol is fluctuationly displayed, It is an effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. The instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 and the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. The notification effect setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S116, the CPU 401 determines whether the notification effect stop command set in the process of step S412 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S116 is YES, the process proceeds to step S117. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S120 of FIG.

  In step S117, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to end the informing effect started in the process of step S115 and finally stop all the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed (confirmed (confirmed) Indication of the result of the special symbol lottery). The instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 and the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S120 of FIG.

  In step S120 of FIG. 35, the CPU 401 determines whether the opening command set in the in-stop process of step S414 of FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S120 is YES, the process proceeds to step S121. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S122.

  In step S121, the CPU 401 issues an opening effect instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to start the opening effect of the big hit game effect. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S122. Also, the opening effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S122, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the round start notification command set in the process of step S608 in FIG. 26 has been received. If the determination in step S122 is YES, the process proceeds to step S123, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S124.

  In step S123, the CPU 401 issues a round effect start instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 to start the round effect process of the big hit game effect. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S124. Further, the round effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S124, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the winning command set in the process of step S614 or the like of FIG. 26 and output by the output process of step S9 of FIG. 13 has been received. If the determination in step S124 is YES, the process proceeds to step S125, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S126.

  In step S125, the CPU 401 issues a winning processing instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 to start the winning process. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S126. In addition, the winning process performed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S126, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the round end notification command set in the process of step S619 in FIG. 26 has been received. If the determination in step S126 is YES, the process proceeds to step S127, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S128.

  In step S127, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to end the round effect of the big hit game effect. The instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 and the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S128.

  In step S128, the CPU 401 determines whether the ending command set in the process of step S622 in FIG. 27 has been received. If the determination in step S128 is YES, the process proceeds to step S129, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S130.

  In step S129, the CPU 401 issues an ending effect instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 to start an ending effect of the big hit game effect. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S130. The ending effect process performed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S130, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the customer waiting command and the game state notification command set in the process of step S416 in FIG. 17 have been received. If the determination in step S130 is YES, the process proceeds to step S131. If the determination is NO, the command reception process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S12 of FIG.

  In step S131, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to start customer waiting processing based on the customer waiting command and the gaming state notification command received in step S130. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Then, the command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S12 in FIG. The customer waiting process is a process that is started when the user is in a so-called customer waiting state, and the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 instructed to start the customer waiting process, for example, instructs the start of notification effect The customer waiting process is executed until it is received, and the customer waiting process is ended by receiving the start instruction of the notification effect. However, when the CPU 501 is notified of information indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 25 and information indicating that the gaming ball has won the normal winning opening, the customer waiting process is continued without ending. . In addition, the customer waiting process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Notification effect setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a notification effect setting process by the effect control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the notification effect setting process of step S115 of FIG.

  First, in step S801, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 executes effect state setting processing for setting an effect state in a notification effect to be executed this time. Here, the rendering state defines what kind of state the current state (for example, the gaming state) in which the notification rendering is being performed is performed, and is referred to when executing the non-interlocking rendering described later. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S802. The details of the effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, and the details of the non-interlocking effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S802, the CPU 401 determines the effect pattern to be executed in the current notification effect based on the setting information included in the notification effect start command received in step S114 in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 24, the CPU 401 executes up to the first SPSP reach when the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) indicated by the setting information is “90.05 seconds” and the big hit Determine the effect pattern (per first SPSP) to be notified, and if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is "90.04 seconds", determine the effect pattern (per second SPSP) to be executed until the second SPSP reach and report a big hit If the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is "90.03 seconds", the effect pattern (per the third SPSP) to be executed by executing the third SPSP reach to notify the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is "90.02 In the case of “seconds”, the effect pattern (per the fourth SPSP) to be executed by the fourth SPSP reach and notified of the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is In the case of “90.01 seconds”, the effect pattern (per pseudo 3) to be notified of the big hit is determined after the pseudo continuous effect of the pseudo repeat number of times 3 times, and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is “40.02 seconds” Determine the effect pattern (per SP) to perform a big hit notification by executing up to SP reach, and after 2 times of pseudo run effect of pseudo run times if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is "40.01 seconds" The effect pattern (per pseudo 2) to be notified of a big hit is determined, and if the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “15.02 seconds”, the effect pattern to be notified of a big hit after passing through a pseudo continuous effect of one pseudo repeat If the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is “15.01 seconds”, the effect pattern (per reach) to be executed by the reach is determined and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is determined. In the case of 68.00 seconds, 60.00 seconds, 48.00 seconds, 36.00 seconds, and 12.00 seconds, 68 seconds, 60 seconds, 48 seconds, and 36 seconds, respectively. Decide the effect pattern (per first measure) to indicate the big hit by repeating the change display of the decorative symbol by 12 seconds, and reach when the change pattern indicated by the setting information is "4.50 seconds". Then, the effect pattern (short hit) to be notified immediately of the big hit is determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is "90.10 seconds", the CPU 401 determines the effect pattern (first SPSP loss) to be executed until the first SPSP reach and reported the loss, and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is " In the case of “90.09 seconds”, the effect pattern (second SPSP loss) to be executed until the second SPSP reach is notified, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.08 seconds”, the third SPSP reach The effect pattern (the third SPSP loss) to be executed until the loss notification is determined, and the change pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.07 seconds”, the effect pattern to be executed until the fourth SPSP reach to notify the loss (the fourth SPSP If the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.06 seconds”, the pseudo-continuous performance of 3 times is performed. Determine the effect pattern (pseudo 3 loss) to be notified of the loss after passing through, and if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is "40.04 seconds", the effect pattern (SP loss) to be executed until the SP reach is notified. If the change pattern indicated by the setting information is "40.03 seconds", the effect pattern (false 2 loss) to be notified of a loss after passing through the pseudo continuous effect of two times of pseudo repeat is determined, and the setting information indicates If the variation pattern is "15.04 seconds", the effect pattern (pseudo 1 loss) to be notified of a loss after passing through one pseudo sequence effect is determined, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is "15.03 seconds" In the case of “”, the effect pattern (reach loss) to be executed until reach is notified is determined, and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the setting information is “13.50 seconds”, “10.00 seconds”, “9. In the case of "0 seconds", "8.00 seconds", "3.00 seconds", "2.00 seconds", "1.50 seconds", or "0.50 seconds", the reach is not executed and the loss notification is given. Determine the effect pattern (immediate loss, first turn loss, short loss, or very short loss) to be performed. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S803.

  In the step S802, the CPU 401 determines a selected play reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68) to be described later as the fourth SPSP reach effect in the normal gaming state, and in the time-saving game state after the one-time big hit, As the 4 SPSP reach effect, a full special effect (see FIGS. 69 and 70) to be described later can be determined. Further, the CPU 401 determines a partial play reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68) to be described later as an SP reach effect in the normal game state, and an SP reach effect described later in the short time game state after a single hit. A short special rendition (see FIGS. 69 and 70) can be determined. In addition, although the types of effect patterns such as the first SPSP reach effect to the fourth SPSP reach effect are not described as the SP reach effect above, the type of the effect pattern of SP reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern Even if is determined, one SP reach effect may be determined from among a plurality of types of SP reach effects by lottery or the like using effect random numbers and the like by the effect control unit 400.

  In step S803, the CPU 401 determines the detailed content (scenario) of the effect based on the effect pattern determined in step S802. Specifically, the CPU 401 determines the effect (reach effect or immediate loss effect) to be finally executed based on the effect pattern determined in step S802, but at that time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Determine the type of symbol (the so-called outcome) based on the effect random number etc. Also, based on the effect random number etc, what kind of notice effect will be configured as a scenario until the final effect is executed Decide. In addition, a notice production is various effects performed until it reaches the effect finally performed determined based on a production pattern or during the production concerned, and the reach which a decoration pattern becomes a reach state is The eye establishment effect, the cut-in effect which announces the reliability during the reach effect, and the like can be mentioned. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S804. In this embodiment, even if the same fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern “40.03 seconds” shown in FIG. 19; pseudo 2 loss) shown in FIG. In some cases, it is possible to determine the rendition of the number of pseudo-sequences different from the type of rendition pattern. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S804, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to execute notification effects of the effect state set in step S801 and the effect contents determined in step S803. The instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the notification effect setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S116 in FIG. It should be noted that the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 that has received the instruction of the notification effect from the effect control unit 400 schedules the execution timing and execution time of the notice effect etc. configured based on the instructed effect state and the contents of the effect. Are performed, and effect execution processing is performed to execute each advance presentation effect and the like according to the schedule. The effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Process state setting process]
Next, the effect state setting process by the effect control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of effect state setting processing in step S801 in FIG.

  First, in step S8011, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the notification effect of this time is the notification effect in the first rotation after the short time gaming state after the sudden hit is started. Note that the CPU 401 can determine whether it is the notification effect of the first rotation by counting up the number of changes after the short time gaming state is started after the jackpot hit, but in FIG. As shown, according to HT3 referred to in the short time gaming state after the big hit, the variation pattern of the first rotation is different from the variation pattern in the other rotation speed in the case of big hit and in the case of losing, It may be determined whether the notification effect of the first rotation is based on the pattern. If the determination in step S8011 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8012, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8013.

  In step S8012, the CPU 401 sets, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, an effect state 1 indicating that the state is the first rotation state in the short time game state after the big hit. In addition, an opportunity to set any of the replacement renewal effects as a dedicated effect after an accident in the first rotation after the momentary short game state after an impact big hit is started by setting this effect state 1 (Time) is provided. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8013, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the notification effect of this time is the notification effect at the 2nd to 30th rotations after the short time gaming state after the sudden hit is started. Specifically, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the notification effect of the 2nd to 30th rotations is made based on the number of fluctuations counted up since the start of the short time gaming state after the big hit. If the determination in step S8013 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8014, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8015.

  In step S8014, the CPU 401 sets up, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, an effect state 2 indicating that the state is the second to 30th rotation in the short time game state after the big hit. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8015, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is a notification effect in the probability variation gaming state after the continuous big hit. If the determination in step S8015 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8016. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8017.

  In step S8016, the CPU 401 sets, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, an effect state 3 indicating that the game is in the probability variation gaming state. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8017, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is a notification effect in a time saving game state after a single hit. If the determination in step S8017 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8018, and if the determination is NO (that is, in the normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step S8019.

  In step S <b> 8018, the CPU 401 sets, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, an effect state 4 indicating that it is a time saving game state after a one-time big hit. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8019, the CPU 401 sets, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, an effect state 5 indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG. In addition, by the image sound control unit 500 instructing the effect state set by the effect state setting process described above, the non-interlocking effect (exclusive effect after impact, selective effect in the probability variation gaming state) described later is executed. It will be

[Determination content determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an effect content determination process by the effect control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the effect content determination process of step S 803 in FIG.

  First, in step S8031, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether an instruction to execute an RTC effect is being issued. Specifically, it is determined whether the RTC rendering instruction in progress flag stored in the RAM 403 is ON. If the determination in step S8031 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8039. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8032.

  In step S8032, the CPU 401 determines the type of symbol (so-called outcome) when the decorative symbol is stopped (or temporarily stopped) based on the effect pattern determined in step S802 in FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S8033.

  In step S8033, the CPU 401 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S802 in FIG. 36 is an effect pattern of pseudo continuous effect. If the determination in step S8033 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8034, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8037.

  In step S8034, the CPU 401 refers to the sub lottery table corresponding to the effect random number and the rotation speed N to determine the number of re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect (simulated continuous number), and then the process proceeds to step S8035. In addition, although it becomes clear by the below-mentioned description, the number of rotations N shows the number of fluctuations (number of rotations) in which the simulated series of three pseudo-sequences is not continuously executed as the notification effect (variation effect). The sub lottery table referred to in step S8034 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S8035, the CPU 401 determines whether or not 3 has been determined as the number of pseudo sequences in the process of step S8034. If the determination in step S8035 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8036. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8037.

  In step S8036, the CPU 401 resets the value of the rotational speed N stored in the RAM 403 to an initial value "0", and updates and stores the value. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S8083.

  In step S8037, the CPU 401 adds 1 to the value of the rotational speed N stored in the RAM 403, and updates and stores the value. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S8038.

  In step S8038, the CPU 401 determines the type of preview effect. Specifically, based on the effect random number according to the effect pattern determined in step S802 of FIG. 36, the CPU 401 determines whether or not to achieve reach eye formation effect, cut-in effect, etc. as the advance effect to be executed. Decide. The higher the reliability of the effect pattern determined in step S802 is, the easier it is to determine to execute an advance notice effect (a high-reliability cut-in effect) for enhancing the player's sense of expectation. Then, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S804 in FIG.

  In step S8039, the CPU 401 determines the effect content of the fluctuation effect (hereinafter, also referred to as RTC compatible fluctuation effect) corresponding to the RTC effect determined to be instructed to be executed in step S8031. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S8040. The RTC compatible fluctuation presentation is a notification presentation (variation presentation) determined so as not to contradict the RTC presentation instructed to be executed in the RTC presentation control process of FIG. 31. For example, the first RTC presentation or replacement presentation When being executed, it is an effect that the decoration symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left and fluctuated so as not to disturb the execution of the effect, and when the second RTC effect is being executed, the second RTC effect (game effect) At the same time, the RTC interlocking advance notice effect (for example, the effect that a game character appears) is displayed the number of times according to the effect pattern (the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern) determined in the process of step S802. Further, the RTC compatible fluctuation presentation execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 based on the instruction to execute the RTC corresponding fluctuation presentation determined by the presentation content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S8040, the CPU 401 adds 1 to the value of the rotational speed N stored in the RAM 403, and updates and stores the value. Then, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S804 in FIG.

  Note that while the pseudo-rectifying effect of the pseudo-rect number of times 3 is not determined as the effect content from the processing of the steps S8036, S8037, and S8040 described above, the rotation speed N continues to be counted up, and the pseudo-rectifying effect of the artificial reciever number of times 3 is determined It is understood that it is reset to 0 by being done. From this, the number of revolutions N indicates the number of times of variation (number of revolutions) in which the simulated series of three times of pseudo series is continuously performed as the notification effect (variation effect).

[Sub lottery table]
In FIG. 39, a variation pattern (about 90 seconds, about 40 seconds) corresponding to pseudo-series effect (type 3 per 3 / loss, 2 per position / loss, 1 per position / loss) of the effect pattern type by the main control unit 100. When about 15 seconds is determined (see, for example, FIG. 19), an example of the sub lottery table that the effect control unit 400 refers to to determine the contents of the effect is shown. In (1) of FIG. 39, a sub lottery table is referred to when the variation pattern (about 15 seconds; 15.02 seconds or 15.04 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern per pseudo 1 / los is determined. (2) in FIG. 39 is referred to when the fluctuation pattern (about 40 seconds; 40.01 seconds or 40.03 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern per pseudo 2 / loss is determined. Sub lottery table 2, and (3) in FIG. 39, a fluctuation pattern (about 90 seconds; 90.01 seconds or 90.06 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern per It is the sub lottery table 3 referred to in the case.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 1 referred to when the variation pattern (about 15 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern per pseudo 1 / losing is determined, “1 When “1 to 70” is selected among the effect random numbers of “100 to 100” (that is, at a rate of 70%), the effect content A1 of one pseudo-repeating number (pseudo 1) is determined. When "71 to 100" is selected among the effect random numbers of "(in other words, at a rate of 30%), the effect content A2 of which the number of pseudo-sequences is twice (pseudo 2) is determined. Therefore, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the type of effect pattern of pseudo 1 is determined by the main control unit 100, the effect control portion 400 performs the lottery using the sub lottery table 1, the effect contents of the pseudo 1 (effect The content A1) may not be determined. However, the effect content A1 of the pseudo 1 is easier to be determined than the effect content A2 of the pseudo 2.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 2 referred to when the fluctuation pattern (about 40 seconds) corresponding to the type of the effect pattern per pseudo 2 / loss is determined, The content of the effect is determined depending on the number of rotations N (that is, the number of times the pseudo continuous effect of three pseudo continuous times is not continuously performed) and the effect random number. Specifically, when the number of rotations N is "1 to 30", if "1 to 35" is selected among the effect random numbers "1 to 100" (that is, at a ratio of 35%) If the number of times of pseudo run is one (pseudo 1) of the effect content B1 is determined, and "36 to 100" is selected among the effect random numbers of "1 to 100" (that is, at a rate of 50%) If effect contents B2 of which the number of times is twice (pseudo 2) is determined and “86 to 100” is selected among the effect random numbers of “1 to 100” (that is, at a ratio of 15%) The effect content B3 of three times (pseudo 3) is determined. Similarly, when the rotation speed N is "31 to 120 times", the effect content B1 is determined at a rate of 25%, the effect content B2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the effect content at a rate of 25% When B3 is determined and the number of revolutions N exceeds "120 times", the effect content B1 is determined at a rate of 10%, the effect content B2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the effect is produced at a rate of 40% The content B3 is determined. That is, by performing the lottery using the sub lottery table 2, as the number of rotations N decreases, it is more difficult to determine the effect contents B3 of pseudo 3 and as the number of rotations N increases, the effect contents B3 become easier to determine. Therefore, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the type of effect pattern of pseudo 2 is determined by the main control unit 100, the effect control unit 400 performs lottery using the sub lottery table 2, and the pseudo 3 continuous effect of pseudo 3 continues As the number of times of change (rotational speed N) not being executed increases, the content of the effect for executing the pseudo series 3 of pseudo 3 becomes easier to be determined.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 3 referred to in the case where the fluctuation pattern (about 90 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern per pseudo 3 / loss is determined, The content of the effect is determined depending on the number of rotations N (that is, the number of times the pseudo continuous effect of three pseudo continuous times is not continuously performed) and the effect random number. Specifically, when the number of rotations N is "1 to 30", if "1 to 50" is selected among the effect random numbers "1 to 100" (that is, at a rate of 50%) If the number of pseudo runs is twice (pseudo 2) of the effect content C2 is determined, and "51 to 100" is selected among the effect random numbers of "1 to 100" (that is, 50% of the rate) pseudo run The effect content C3 of which the number is three times (pseudo 3) is determined. Similarly, when the number of rotations N is “31 to 120 times”, the effect content C2 is determined at a rate of 30%, the effect content C3 is determined at a rate of 70%, and the number of rotations N is “120 times In the case of exceeding 10%, the effect content C2 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the effect content C3 is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, when the lottery by the sub lottery table 3 is performed, it is difficult to determine the effect content C3 of the pseudo 3 as the rotation speed N decreases, and the effect content C3 is easily determined as the rotation speed N increases. Therefore, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the type of effect pattern of pseudo 3 is determined by the main control unit 100, the effect control unit 400 performs lottery using the sub lottery table 3, and the pseudo 3 effect of pseudo 3 continues If the number of changes not being executed (number of revolutions N) is small, the percentage at which the effect content C2 for which the pseudo series effect of pseudo 3 is not performed is determined is relatively higher than when the number of revolutions N is large. Become.

  As described above, since the effect control unit 400 determines the effect contents with reference to the sub lottery tables 1 to 3, the simulation of the pseudo continuous effect of the type of effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control unit 100. There may be a case where a pseudo-sequence effect of a pseudo-sequence number different from the sequence number is performed. Further, as can be seen by comparing the sub lottery table 2 and the sub lottery table 3, regardless of the value of the number of revolutions N, the pseudo lottery effect of the pseudo 3 is executed in the sub lottery table 3 rather than the sub lottery table 2. easy. That is, regardless of the value of the rotation speed N, the variation pattern corresponds to the pseudo 2 effect pattern in the case where the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 corresponds to the pseudo 3 effect pattern. The pseudo series 3 of pseudo 3 is easier to be executed than in the case of the virtual one. However, even if the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 corresponds to the effect pattern of pseudo 2, if the value of the rotation speed N becomes large (that is, the pseudo 3 continuous effect of pseudo 3 is continuously performed When the number of times of fluctuation does not increase (the number of times of fluctuation increases), the pseudo 3 pseudo-series effect is easily performed. As a result, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the effect pattern of the pseudo 3 is not determined by the main control unit 100, the pseudo continuous effect of the pseudo 3 can be easily performed. Therefore, the main control unit 100 does not determine the change pattern corresponding to the effect pattern of pseudo 3 for a long period of time (over a large number of changes), so even if the pseudo 3 effect of pseudo 3 is not executed, Even when the variation pattern corresponding to the effect pattern of the pseudo 2 is determined, the control unit 400 makes it easy to execute the pseudo continuous effect of the pseudo 3 so that the pseudo 3 effect of the pseudo 3 is not performed over a long period of time Can be prevented. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's interest is reduced by not executing the pseudo 3 pseudo-series rendering (that is, the rendering with high expectation). On the contrary, when the pseudo 3 series effect of pseudo 3 is executed recently (that is, when the value of the number of revolutions N is small), the main control unit 100 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect pattern of pseudo 3 Even if it does, the appearance control part 400 of pseudo | simulation 3 can suppress the appearance frequency of the pseudo | simulation co-production of pseudo | simulation 3 by making the ratio in which the pseudo | simulation co-production of pseudo | simulation 3 is performed low. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the sense of scarcity of the high expectation degree of production is impaired by the frequent occurrence of the pseudo 3 series of pseudo 3 production (that is, the high expectation degree production).

  In the example of the sub lottery table shown in FIG. 39, there is no particular distinction as to whether the variation pattern indicates the big hit or the loss, but the sub lottery may differ depending on whether the variation is the big hit or the loss. The table may be referred to. More specifically, the sub-lottery table may be referred to in which the effect content in the case of a big hit is more likely to be selected in the case where there is a larger number of pseudo-sequences than in the case of a loss.

  As described above, various effects (RTC effects, round effects, selected play reach effects, partial play reach effects, full special effects, shorts, etc.) characteristic of the present embodiment described later by the timer interrupt process performed by the effect control unit 400 as described above A special effect, a pseudo-series effect, an exclusive effect after a collision, a selection effect during a probability variation game), and the like are determined, and execution of these effects is instructed to the image sound control unit 500. In the following, the timer interrupt process performed by the image sound control unit 500 will be described based on the execution instruction of various effects and the like from the effect control unit 400.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit]
FIGS. 40 to 59 are flowcharts showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the image sound control unit 500. The timer interrupt process performed by the image sound control unit 500 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 59. Based on an instruction from the effect control unit 400, the image sound control unit 500 performs the processing shown in FIGS. 40 to 59 for a predetermined time during normal operation except for special cases such as power on or power off. It is repeatedly executed every (for example, 33 milliseconds). The processing performed by the image sound control unit 500 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 59 is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 502. Moreover, in the flowcharts shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 59, the description of parts other than the characteristic effects in the present embodiment is simplified.

[RTC production execution processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 40, an RTC effect execution process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on an instruction to execute an RTC effect from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S1050 in FIG. 40, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 performs a first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process. The details of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1080.

  In step S1080, the CPU 501 performs a second RTC presentation execution process. The details of the second RTC effect will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1100.

  In step S1100, the CPU 501 determines whether an end instruction of the RTC effect (the first RTC effect, the exchange effect, or the second RTC effect) is received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1100 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1110. If this determination is NO, the RTC rendering execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 40 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Do.

  In step S 1110, the CPU 501 sets an end standby flag to ON and stores the end standby flag in the RAM 503. Here, the end standby flag is a flag indicating that the instruction to end the RTC effect has been received by being set to ON. Then, the RTC effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 40 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[1st RTC production / replacement production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process of step S1050 in FIG.

  In step S1051 of FIG. 41, the CPU 501 determines whether the end wait flag stored in the RAM 503 is ON (that is, whether an instruction to end the RTC effect has been received). If the determination in step S1051 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1060. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1052.

  In step S1052, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute the first RTC effect or replacement effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1052 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1053, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1056.

  In step S1053, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC before the start of the variation effect or the big hit effect is being executed. Here, the variation presentation before the start of RTC is a notification presentation (a variation presentation) that is already being executed when an instruction to execute the RTC presentation (the first RTC presentation, the second RTC presentation, the exchange presentation) is received, and the big hit presentation It is an effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) executed in the big hit gaming state. If the determination in step S1053 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1054, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1055.

  In step S1054, the CPU 501 wipes and displays the RTC effect (first RTC effect or replacement effect) which has received the execution instruction in step S1052. Here, the wipe display is to display an effect in the wipe area 6 w (see (1A) in FIG. 62 described later) obtained by cutting a part of the entire screen of the image display unit 6, and the wipe display According to this, it is possible to prevent the other effect that is already being executed in the image display unit 6 from being disturbed. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1055, the CPU 501 displays the full screen of the RTC effect (first RTC effect or replacement effect) which has received the execution instruction in step S1052. Here, full screen display means displaying effects on the entire screen of the image display unit 6. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1056, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the first RTC effect or the exchange effect is displayed as a wipe. If the determination in step S1056 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1057. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1059.

  In step S1057, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC variation presentation has ended. If the determination in step S1057 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1058. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1059.

  In step S1058, the CPU 501 switches the RTC effect currently being executed from the wipe display to the full screen display. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1059, the CPU 501 continuously displays the effect currently being executed as it is. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1060, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC compatible change presentation has ended, or a big hit presentation is in progress. As described above, the RTC compatible change effect is determined so as not to cause contradiction with the RTC effect, and is a change effect (notification effect) corresponding to the RTC effect. For example, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left It is an effect to be displayed. If the determination in step S1060 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1061. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1059.

  In step S1061, the CPU 501 ends the RTC effect (first RTC effect or replacement effect) being executed, and sets the end standby flag stored in the RAM 503 to OFF. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG. The outline of the first RTC effect / replacement effect described above will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

[Second RTC production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a second RTC presentation execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the second RTC effect execution process of step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1081 of FIG. 42, the CPU 501 determines whether the end waiting flag stored in the RAM 503 is ON (that is, whether the end instruction of the RTC effect has been received). If the determination in step S1081 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1095. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1082.

  In step S1082, the CPU 501 determines whether an instruction to execute the second RTC effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1082 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1083, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1086. As described above with reference to FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short time gaming state, the presentation control unit 400 to the image sound control unit 500 for the second RTC effect The execution instruction is not issued (that is, the process of step S108 of FIG. 31 is not performed because it is determined NO in step S107 of FIG. 31). Therefore, in these gaming states, the determination in step S1082 is NO.

  In step S <b> 1083, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC variation presentation is being performed. If the determination in step S1083 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1084, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1085.

  In step S1084, the CPU 501 wipes and displays the second RTC effect. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1085, the CPU 501 displays the second RTC effect on the entire screen. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1086, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the second RTC effect is displayed as a wipe. If the determination in step S1086 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1087. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1092.

  In step S1087, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC variation presentation has ended. If the determination in step S1087 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1088. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1089.

  In step S1088, the CPU 501 switches the currently executing second RTC effect from the wipe display to the full screen display. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1089, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the simultaneous game effect in the second RTC effect. Here, the second RTC effect is the game effect described above in the present embodiment, but more specifically, a preparation effect for 30 seconds, a simultaneous game effect after that, and an end effect after that (in some cases, an extension effect) Game effect) is a series of effects. Therefore, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the start timing of this simultaneous game effect (more specifically, the timing when 30 seconds has elapsed from the second set time) in the second RTC effect. The details of the simultaneous game effect will be described later with reference to FIG. If the determination in step S1089 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1090. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1090, the CPU 501 makes the display mode of the second RTC effect (more specifically, the simultaneous game effect) translucent and displays the entire screen. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1091, the CPU 501 continuously displays the effect currently being executed as it is. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1092, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the second RTC effect is displayed in a semi-transparent manner. If the determination in step S1092 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1093, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1093, the CPU 501 determines whether the pre-RTC change presentation has ended. If the determination in step S1093 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1094, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1094, the CPU 501 switches and displays the second RTC effect that has been displayed semi-transparently to the normal display mode (display mode that is not semi-transparent display). Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1095, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC compatible change presentation has ended. If the determination in step S1095 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1096. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1096, the CPU 501 ends the second RTC effect, and sets the end standby flag to OFF. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1100 in FIG.

  As described above, in the second RTC effect, the simultaneous game effect is started at a timing 30 seconds after receiving the instruction to start the second RTC effect (that is, 30 seconds have passed from the second set time) Because the pre-RTC start variation effect is not finished when the simultaneous game effect starts (that is, NO in step S1087 and NO in step S1089), the pre-RTC start variation effect is It will last for more than 30 seconds. Here, since the fluctuation presentation before the start of RTC is the fluctuation presentation already being executed when the instruction to execute the RTC presentation is received, that the fluctuation presentation lasts for 30 seconds or more has a long fluctuation time (that is, A relatively high reliability) effect (for example, effect based on the type of effect pattern developed to SP reach or SPSP reach shown in FIG. 19) is being executed. At this time, since the second RTC effect (simultaneous game effect) is displayed in a semi-transparent display, for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect with a long fluctuation time (relatively high reliability) is executed. Sometimes, simultaneous game effects are displayed semi-transparently to ensure visibility of highly reliable SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects. On the other hand, as described above, in the plurality of gaming machines 1 (see FIG. 9) installed on one island in the pachinko hall, the time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. For this reason, simultaneous game effects are simultaneously executed in a plurality of game machines 1, but even if SP reach effects or SPSP reach effects of high reliability are executed, they are displayed semi-transparently (that is, executed) Therefore, as a whole gaming system including a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island, it is possible to prevent the sense of unity of simultaneous game presentation from being lost. The outline of the effect of the second RTC effect (simultaneous effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

[Opening production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the opening effect process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the execution instruction of the opening effect from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S1210 of FIG. 43, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute an opening effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1210 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1211, and if the determination is NO, the opening effect process is ended, and the process shown in FIG. 43 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1211, the CPU 501 determines, based on the opening command received via the effect control unit 400, whether the big hit is a big hit from the normal gaming state (a so-called first hit). If the determination in step S1211 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1212. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1212, the CPU 501 erases the history information stored in the RAM 503. By the way, the CPU 501 is, for example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the normal winning port 24 etc. in the normal gaming state, the first large in the big hit gaming state The history information such as the number of winning balls, the number of big hits, etc. paid out based on the game ball winning on the winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51 and the like is stored. Then, since the history information is erased by the process of step S1212, after the opening effect is started (that is, after the big hit game is started), to the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, etc. The number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings of is newly counted. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213, the CPU 501 stores the big hit history in the RAM 503. Specifically, the CPU 501 adds 1 to the value of the number of big hits Wc stored in the RAM 503 and updates the value in the RAM 503 as history information. By this processing, the number Wc of successive big hits is stored in the RAM 503 as history information. The number Wc of big hits is set to 0 as an initial value, and is reset to 0 by the process of step S1212 described above. As a reset condition, the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is over It may be reset to 0 on condition that Further, as the big hit history, information indicating the type of big hit (one of the big hits A to D shown in FIG. 6) may be stored in the RAM 503 in addition to the above-described number of big hits Wc. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1214.

  In step S1214, the CPU 501 starts an opening effect for a specified time. Here, the opening effect is an effect for informing the start of the big hit game, and is typically an image effect that urges the player to shoot the game ball toward the first large winning opening 23. Then, the opening effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 43 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Paid process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the winning process performed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the start instruction of the winning process from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S1250 of FIG. 44, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to start a winning process from the effect control unit 400 has been received. If the determination in step S1250 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1251. If the determination is NO, the winning process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 44 is repeatedly executed at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1251, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the winning processing instructed in step S1250 is based on gaming ball winning (V winning) on the V area 53. If the determination in step S1251 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1252, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S1252, the CPU 501 determines whether the output completion flag stored in the RAM 503 is OFF. Here, the output completion flag is a flag indicating that V winning effect described later has been executed by being set to ON. If the determination in step S1252 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1253, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S1253, the CPU 501 executes a V winning effect (for example, output of a specific sound effect or display of a specific V image) to notify that the V winning has been made, and sets the output flag stored in the RAM 503 to ON. . Thereby, it is indicated that the V prize effect has already been executed, and the V prize effect is executed only once during one big hit. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S1254, the CPU 501 selects each winning opening (the first starting opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the first large winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51 based on the winning instruction instructed by the effect control unit 400. , The number of winning of the game ball to the normal winning opening 24) is counted up and stored in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1255.

  In step S1255, when the CPU 501 receives a winning instruction based on the game ball winning to the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51 (that is, the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51) When one ball wins), the corresponding number of winning balls “13” is added to the total number of winning balls T stored in the RAM 503 and updated. In addition, the total number of winning balls T is set to 0 as an initial value, and is reset to 0 by the processing of step S1212 described above, but as a reset condition, the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is over It may be reset to 0 on condition that it is done. By the process of step S1255, the total number T of winning balls acquired while the big hit is stored in the RAM 503 as the big hit history. Further, in the present embodiment, the total number of winning balls T is calculated by adding the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings on the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51. However, in addition to the game ball winnings on the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51, the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings on other winning openings is also added. It is good also as things. For example, when a winning instruction corresponding to the game ball winning to the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22 is received, the first starting opening is added by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the total number of winning balls T. The number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings on the first start port 22 and the second starting opening 22 may be added together. In addition, when a winning instruction corresponding to the game ball winning to the normal winning opening 24 is received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is added to the total number T of winning balls, based on the game ball winning to the normal winning opening 24. The number of prize balls paid out may be added together. That is, any of the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to the first start opening 21, the second starting opening 22, and the normal winning opening 24 described above is added in combination to the total number of winning balls. Also, all may be added. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1256.

  In step S1256, the CPU 501 causes the image display unit 6 to display information indicating the total number of winning balls T updated in the RAM 503 by the process of step S1255. As a result, the total number T of winning balls updated every time the game ball wins in the first large winning opening 23 and the second large winning opening 51 during the round game is displayed on the image display unit 6. Then, the winning processing ends, and the processing shown in FIG. 44 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt processing.

[Ending effect processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, an ending effect process will be described which is executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the instruction to execute the ending effect from the effect control unit 400.

  In step S1290 in FIG. 45, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute ending effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S 1290 is YES, the process proceeds to step S 1291. If the determination is NO, the opening effect process is ended, and the process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed at the next timer interrupt process timing. .

  In step S1291, the CPU 501 executes an ending effect for a specified time. Here, the ending effect is an effect of informing the end of the big hit game, and is typically an effect of displaying a mark of the maker of the gaming machine 1. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1292.

  In step S1292, the CPU 501 indicates a mode effect (for example, a probability change gaming state) to be executed after the ending effect (that is, after the end of the big hit game effect) based on the ending effect instruction (ending command). The effect is performed in advance in the lower layer of the ending effect displayed on the image display unit 6. Specifically, the ending command is transmitted based on the jackpot symbol (for example, jackpot A shown in FIG. 6) and includes information on the state of presentation after the end of the jackpot game (in other words, after the jackpot game is over) Since the ending command corresponding to the rendering state is transmitted), the CPU 501 knows the rendering state after the big hit game is over before receiving the gaming state notification command transmitted along with the customer waiting command or the notification rendering start command. be able to. Therefore, the CPU 501 executes the effect in advance corresponding to each effect state before the customer waiting command or the notification effect start command is transmitted, so that the big hit game is immediately performed at the timing when the ending effect ends. It is possible to start the effect in the effect state after the end. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1293.

  In step S1293, the CPU 501 sets the output completion flag stored in the RAM 503 to OFF. As a result, when the big hit game is started next and the V winning is realized for the first time during the big hit game, the V winning effect will be executed. Then, the ending effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Round effect processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the round effect process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the execution instruction of the round effect from the effect control unit 400 will be described. In the present embodiment, a round effect performed in the V round is referred to as a V round effect, and a round effect performed in a round other than the V round is referred to as a normal round effect. Further, in the present embodiment, as the normal round effect, a selected effect that allows the player to select the effect content or a non-selected effect that is a predetermined effect content that the player can not select the effect content is executed. The selection effect is selected from additional update effects updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 and executed.

  In step S1230 of FIG. 46, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute a round effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1230 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1231. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1238.

  In step S1231, the CPU 501 displays the current number of rounds on the image display unit 6 based on the information indicating the current number of rounds R instructed from the effect control unit 400, and is stored in the RAM 503 as a big hit history. Information indicating the number Wc of big hits is displayed on the image display unit 6. However, the CPU 501 does not display the number of rounds of the round when it is a round in which only an open for a very short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1232.

  In step S1232, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the execution instruction of the round effect received in step S1230 is the execution instruction of the V round effect (that is, the round effect of the big hit A or the big hit D shown in FIG. 6). Or not). If the determination in step S1232 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1234. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1233.

  In step S1233, the CPU 501 executes a normal round effect as a round effect. Specifically, when the CPU 501 receives an instruction to execute the first round effect in the first R in step S 1230, the CPU 501 starts a normal round effect, and when receiving an instruction to execute another round effect, the CPU 501 is in execution. Continue normal round production. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1238.

  In step S1234, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the selection effect is being executed among the normal round effects. If the determination in step S1234 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1235. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1236. The details of the selection effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 and the like.

  In step S1235, the CPU 501 temporarily suspends the currently selected selection effect. Specifically, the CPU 501 temporarily stops the output of the effect image and the effect sound of the selection effect of the specified time being executed, and stores the temporary stop timing in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1237.

  In step S1236, the CPU 501 stops the display of the non-selection effect being executed. Specifically, the CPU 501 hides the image of the non-selection effect being executed. At this time, the output of the effect sound of the non-selected effect may be continued. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1237.

  In step S1237, the CPU 501 starts the V round effect. Here, the V round effect is an effect executed during the V long round game of the big hit game, for example, displays a notification image instructing the V area 53 to aim for winning of the game ball, or the V area 53 This is an effect of displaying an image showing the letter V after the game ball has won (see (4) in FIG. 66 described later). Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1238, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to end the V-round effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1238 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1239. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1243.

  In step S1239, the CPU 501 ends the V round effect being executed. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1240.

  In step S1240, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the selected effect is paused. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the temporary stop timing of the selected effect is stored in the RAM 503. If the determination in step S1240 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1241. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1242.

  In step S1241, the CPU 501 resumes the selected effect. Specifically, based on the pause timing stored in the RAM 503, the output of the image of the selected effect and the output of the effect sound are resumed from the paused position. In addition, the CPU 501 erases the pause timing of the selection effect stored in the RAM 503. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1242, the CPU 501 resumes the display of the image of the non-selected effect that was not displayed. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1243, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a round effect is in progress (usually in a round effect or in a V round effect). If the determination in step S1243 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1244, and if this determination is NO, the round effect process is ended, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1244, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a selection effect is being executed. If the determination in step S1244 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1245. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1246.

  In step S1245, the CPU 501 executes the effect selection process, ends the round effect process, and repeatedly executes the process shown in FIG. 46 again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. The details of the effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1246, the CPU 501 continues the effect (non-selected effect or V-round effect) being executed. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  When the above-described round effect process is being executed, when the first RTC effect or the exchange effect is executed by the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process, the first RTC effect or the exchange effect is a wipe area 6w (described later) Wipe display is performed in (1A) of FIG.

[Select production process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect selection process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the effect selection process of step S1245 of FIG.

  In step S1301 of FIG. 47, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 starts or continues the execution of the selection effect set in the RAM 503. In addition, the selection effect is an effect to be executed in the jackpot game or in a probability variation gaming state which will be described in detail later, and the additional update effect (see (5) in FIG. 32) updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404. From the inside, the setting is made in the RAM 503 by the player's selection operation (the operation of the effect key 38) (see steps S1304, 1306, 1310 and 1313 described later). In addition, when there is no selection operation by the player, an effect (for example, the play effect "A-1") which is initially set in advance is set in the RAM 503 as the selected effect. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect selection screen is being displayed. Although details will be described later, the effect selection screen is a screen (see (1) in FIG. 66 described later) for selecting an effect (additional update effect) to be executed by the player as a selected effect, and is displayed in the initial state The display is started with the operation of the left and right keys of the effect key 38 (see step S1304 described later), for example, non-displayed when the predetermined time elapses without the operation (see step S1317 described later). If the determination in step S1302 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, the CPU 501 determines whether the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. The operation state of the effect key 38 is detected by the effect control unit 400 and transmitted to the image sound control unit 500. If the determination in step S1303 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1304. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1304, the CPU 501 displays (appears) an effect selection screen. In the effect selection screen, a cursor (see (1) in FIG. 66) for indicating the name of the additional update effect (selected effect) currently being executed (set in the RAM 503) is displayed. Here, this cursor is fixedly displayed, but the name (identification information) of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is switched and displayed by the operation of the effect key 38 of the player described later. It is shown that the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is switched as a selected effect. In the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the name of the additional update effect "A-1" and the like is written as "A-1" and the like. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1305, the CPU 501 determines whether the up and down keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S1305 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1306. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1306, the CPU 501 switches the selection effect according to the operation of the up / down key of the effect key 38, sets it in the RAM 503, and starts the display of the set effect (after switching). Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  Here, switching of the selected effect in step S1306 will be described with reference to (1) in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 32, additional update effects are specified among the theater effects of the categories A to D stored in the ROM 502 according to the time indicated by the current RTC 404 (that is, according to the phase). Specifically, for example, when six weeks have passed since the operation of the gaming machine, the phase of Category A is updated to 30 (5 × 6), and the phase of Category B is updated to 36 (6 × 6). , The phase of category C is updated to 6 (1 × 6), and the phase of category D is updated to 6 (1 × 6). Therefore, as additional update effects, theatrical effects “A-1” to “A-30”, “B-1” to “B-36”, “C-1” to “C-6”, “D-1” 'To' D-6 'are identified. When the process of step S1306 is executed (ie, when the effect selection screen is not displayed and the up and down keys of the effect key 38 are operated), these additional update effects are shown in FIG. As shown in 60 (1), they are virtually arranged in the order of categories A, B, C, D, and in ascending order of the numbers in the category, and from among the additional update effects according to the operation of the up and down keys The selected effect to be selected is switched. For example, when the selected effect currently set in the RAM 503 is "A-30", if there is one operation of the upper key, the selected effect is switched to "A-29" arranged immediately above, and the RAM 503 is selected. When the down key is operated once, the selected effect is switched to "B-1" arranged immediately below, and the RAM 503 is updated and set. As described above, in the present embodiment, the selection effect can be switched by operating the up and down keys of the effect key 38 when the effect selection screen is not displayed. In other words, the effect selection that selects the selection effect The selection effect can be switched without displaying the screen. When the selected effect is switched in this way, the switched selected effect starts to be reproduced from the beginning of the effect.

  Description returns to FIG. 47. In step S1307, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect button 37 has been pressed. The operation state of the effect button 37 is detected by the lamp control unit 600 and transmitted to the image sound control unit 500 via the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1307 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1308. If this determination is NO, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1308, the CPU 501 switches the selection mode when selecting the selected effect according to the pressing operation of the effect button 37. Here, in the selection mode, when one selection effect (theatrical effect) is finished, the next selection effect (theatrical effect) is automatically selected from the additional update effects when the player does not select the selection effect. For example, there is a sequential selection mode within the same category, a random selection mode within the same category, and a random selection mode within all categories. In the same category sequential selection mode, additional update effects which are the same category (one of categories A to D) as the selection effect currently being executed (stored in the RAM 503) are sequentially selected (in the RAM 503). Mode), for example, when "A-5" is currently being executed, the next order "A-6" is executed. The same category in-category random selection mode is a mode in which additional update effects, which are the same category as the currently performed selection effects, are randomly executed. For example, when “A-5” is currently being executed, "A-2" is a mode to be executed. The all category random selection mode is a mode in which additional update effects are randomly executed regardless of the category of selection effects currently being executed. For example, when “A-5” is currently being executed, In this mode, “B-3” is executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection mode can be switched by operating the effect button 37 when the effect selection screen is not displayed. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1309, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S1309 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1310. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1312.

  In step S1310, the CPU 501 executes the display switching of the category on the effect selection screen in accordance with the operation of the left and right keys of the effect key 38 (see (2B) in FIG. 66 described later). Note that the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category before switching and the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category after switching are associated in advance, for example, before switching When "A-4" of category A is displayed in the cursor in the category, when switching to category B, "B-4" of category B is displayed in the cursor. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1311, the CPU 501 sets an additional update effect of the name displayed in the cursor after category switching as a selected effect in the RAM 503, and starts the selected effect. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1312, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the up and down keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S1312 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1313, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1315.

  In step S1313, the CPU 501 switches the display in the cursor. Specifically, the CPU 501 switches the display of the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category of the effect selection screen according to the operation of the up and down keys of the effect key 38. Thus, the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is transitionally displayed. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1314.

  In step S1314, the CPU 501 sets the additional update effect of the name displayed in the cursor after switching as a selected effect in the RAM 503, and starts the selected effect. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  Here, with reference to (2) of FIG. 60, the display switching of the category in step S1310 and the display switching in the cursor of step S1313 will be described. Now, as described above with reference to (1) of FIG. 60, six weeks have passed since the operation of the gaming machine, and as the additional update effect, theatrical effects "A-1" to "A-30" of category A. , Category B theater effects "B-1" to "B-36", category C theater effects "C-1" to "C-6", category D theater effects "D-1" to "D-6" Is assumed to be identified. At this time, when the processing of step S1310 is performed (that is, when the operation of the left and right keys of the effect key is performed when the effect selection screen is displayed), as shown in (2) of FIG. The category of additional update effects (theatrical effects) is switched in sequence. Specifically, for example, if the category on the effect selection screen currently displayed is category A, switching to category D if there is one operation of the left key and that there is one operation of the right key It is switched to category B. At this time, when the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is "A-4", the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is "D-4" when the left key is operated once. The additional update effect which is switched and updated and set in the RAM 503 and displayed on the cursor when the right key is operated once is switched to "B-4" and is updated and set in the RAM 503. That is, by switching the category, the additional update effect corresponding to the switched category is set as the selected effect. On the other hand, when the process of step S1313 is performed (that is, when the up and down keys of the effect key are operated when the effect selection screen is displayed), the additional update effect in each category is as shown in FIG. As shown in (2), the categories are arranged in ascending order of the numbers in the category for each category, and the selection effect selected from among the additional update effects is switched according to the operation of the up and down keys. For example, if the current category is category A and the selected effect currently set in the RAM 503 is "A-2", the selection effect is "A-1" when the upper key is operated once. It is switched and updated and set in the RAM 503, and when the down key is operated once, the selected effect is switched to "A-3" and updated and set in the RAM 503. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect selection screen is displayed, it is possible to switch the category of additional update effects that can be selected as the selected effect by operating the left and right keys of the effect key 38. By performing the key operation, it is possible to switch the additional update effect to be set as the selection effect in the current category.

  In step S1315, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the depression operation of the effect button 37 (an operation of determining the additional update effect displayed in the currently displayed cursor as the selected effect) is performed. If the determination in step S1315 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1317. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1316.

  In step S1316, the CPU 501 determines whether 3 seconds have passed since the category display switching or the display switching of the additional update effect in the cursor is performed, or such display switching is not performed (that is, the effect selection screen It is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since If the determination in step S1316 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1317. If this determination is NO, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1317, the CPU 501 hides the displayed effect selection screen. Further, the CPU 501 enlarges the display area of the selection effect being executed, in response to the non-display of the effect selection screen. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  As described above, according to the above-described effect selection process, the effect key 38 and the effect button 37 can provide different functions depending on whether or not the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6. Specifically, the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are used to switch the category of the selected effect when the effect selection screen is displayed, while the effect selection screen is displayed when the effect selection screen is not displayed. When the effect selection screen is displayed, the up and down keys of the effect key 38 are used to select the selected effect in the same category, while the effect selection screen is not displayed. Is used to switch the selection effect to be executed from among all the additional update effects. Further, the effect button 37 is used to switch the selection mode when the effect selection screen is not displayed, and as a trigger for hiding the effect selection screen when the effect selection screen is displayed. Used. Although the details will be described later, the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are also used to change the set volume level in the customer waiting state (see steps S7208 and S7209 in FIG. 49 described later). Before the selected play reach effect is executed, it is also used for selecting the reach effect on the reach selection screen (see (3) in FIG. 68 described later). The outline of the effect of the above-described round effect (selected effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

[Waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the customer waiting process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the start instruction of the customer waiting process from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S701 in FIG. 48, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to start the customer waiting process has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S701 is YES, the process proceeds to step S702, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S702, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect executed before receiving the start instruction of the customer waiting process is a selected effect to be executed in the RTC effect or the probability variation gaming state. In the present embodiment, the selection effect is executed not only in the round of the big hit game when winning in the big hit D described above, but also in the probability variation gaming state. In addition, although it becomes clear by the description given later, since the selection effect and the RTC effect executed in the probability variation gaming state are continuously executed without stopping the progress of the effect even in the customer waiting state, We will refer to the effect as a continuous effect. If the determination in step S702 is YES, the process proceeds to step S703, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S703, the CPU 501 continues executing the continuous effect being executed as it is. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, the CPU 501 uses a counter function capable of measuring time, which is used for control to cause the image display unit 6 to display an image, and the elapsed time after receiving an instruction to start customer waiting processing (more specifically, , Elapsed time since the continuous effect is executed in the customer waiting state) counting of P is started. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S709.

  In step S705, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect being executed before receiving the customer wait process start instruction is the effect to be executed in the short time game state after the big hit (only special effect after the hit). judge. The details of the special effects after a collision are described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, but are effects selected by the player from among the currently set replacement update effects. If the determination in step S705 is YES, the process proceeds to step S706, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S706, the CPU 501 suspends the progress of the dedicated effect after the collision and stores the pause timing in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S 707.

  In step S 707, the CPU 501 starts displaying the customer waiting screen on the image display unit 6. Here, with the customer waiting screen, all the decorative symbols displayed in a variable display are completely stopped, and it is informed that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and then the predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds) is stopped as it is This is a stop screen that is displayed when there is no next notification effect to be subsequently executed (that is, when there is no hold) at the time of display, and is a screen that indicates that the notification effect is not being executed. The customer waiting screen is typically a screen on which the image on which the decorative symbol has been completely stopped is completely taken over at the end of the informing effect is taken over and displayed in a stopped manner, but which indicates that the informing effect is not being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this typical example. In addition, when the special production after the accident is executed at the end of the notification production, the display screen in a state in which the special production is temporarily stopped after the collision is taken over and displayed, and Output of the rendering sound is stopped. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S708.

  In step S 708, the CPU 501 uses a counter function capable of measuring time, which is used for control to display an image on the image display unit 6, an elapsed time after receiving an instruction to start customer waiting processing (more specifically, , Elapsed time since the display of the customer waiting screen is started) X counting is started. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S709.

  In step S 709, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the continuous effect (RTC effect or selected effect) is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S709 is YES, the process proceeds to step S710. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S710, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the end timing of the continuous effect. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the end timing of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state is not ended (does not have an end timing) in the continuation effect, but the continuation effect is a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) when the customer waiting state It is good also as what ends by progress. If the determination in step S710 is YES, the process proceeds to step S711, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S711, the CPU 501 resets the count of the elapsed time P after the continuation effect is executed in the customer waiting state to 0 seconds, and stops the count operation of P. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S712.

  In step S 712, the CPU 501 starts displaying the customer waiting screen on the image display unit 6. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, the CPU 501 starts counting the elapsed time X since the start of the display of the customer waiting screen, using the time-countable counter function used for the control of displaying the image on the image display unit 6, etc. . Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S716.

  In step S714, the CPU 501 determines whether the elapsed time P has reached a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the continuous effect has been continued for 30 seconds in the customer waiting state. If the determination in step S714 is YES, the process proceeds to step S715, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S715, the CPU 501 changes the volume level of the effect sound of the continuous effect. Specifically, one of volume levels 1 to 10, for example, is stored in the RAM 503 as the set volume level, and for example, when there is no change operation by the player, the initial level 5 is stored as the set volume level. If there is a change operation by the player, the level after change (for example, level 7) is stored as the set volume level (see step S7209 in FIG. 49 described later). The CPU 501 sets the set volume level set in the RAM 503 lowered by, for example, two levels in the RAM 503 as a customer waiting volume level, or sets a fixed volume level (for example, volume level 1) to the customer regardless of the set volume level. The waiting volume level is set in the RAM 503. Then, the CPU 501 outputs the volume of the newly set customer waiting volume level as the effect sound of the continuous effect and executes the continuous effect. As a result, when 30 seconds have passed after the continuous effect is performed in the customer waiting state, the volume of the effect sound of the continuous effect is changed. Note that the volume level after change may be any, for example, the volume level may be 0 (i.e., mute). In addition, when the volume level of the continuous effect currently being executed is the customer waiting volume level and it is not in the customer waiting state (that is, when a new special symbol variation is started), the CPU 501 waits for the customer. The medium volume level is cleared, and the continuous effect is executed at the volume of the set volume level set in the RAM 503. As a result, when a new special symbol variation is started, a normal (original) volume effect sound is output again. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S716.

  In step S716, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is a start timing of an RTC effect (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, exchange effect). If the determination in step S716 is YES, the process proceeds to step S717, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S719. In addition, when it becomes a customer waiting state in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state, it is not determined to be the start timing of the second RTC effect (see FIG. 33).

  In step S717, the CPU 501 ends the display of the screen being executed in the image display unit 6, and switches and displays the screen so that the RTC effect is executed in the image display unit 6. The RTC effect in the image display unit 6 is executed by an RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S718.

  In step S 718, CPU 501 executes a continuous effect (in this case, an RTC effect) using a counter function capable of measuring time, which is used for control to display an image on image display unit 6, in this case, after waiting for a customer. Start counting the elapsed time P of Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S719.

  In step S719, the CPU 501 executes the customer waiting switching process, ends the customer waiting process, and repeatedly executes the process shown in FIG. 48 again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. The details of the customer waiting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the above-described customer waiting process, when the dedicated effect is performed after the collision before the customer waiting state, the dedicated effect after the collision is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stopped state is The screen is displayed as a customer waiting screen. Note that this special effect after a collision is resumed by the processing of step S9048 shown in FIG. 51 described later. In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the customer wait state, the effect sound of the continuous effect (RTC effect or selected effect) which has been executed until then is changed in volume level (for example, the volume is decreased) and output Be done. As described above, the volume of the continuous effect is changed when 30 seconds elapse after the customer waiting state, but the volume is changed at the same time as the customer waiting state without the elapse of 30 seconds. It is good also as things.

[Wait switching process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, switching processing while waiting for a customer by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the customer waiting change process of step S719 in FIG.

  In step S7191 of FIG. 49, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the customer waiting screen is being displayed on the image display unit 6 or the continuous effect is being displayed. If the determination in step S7191 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7192, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7196.

  In step S7192, the CPU 501 determines whether a TOP menu switching operation has been performed. Here, the TOP menu switching operation refers to a predetermined operation on the effect button 37 instructing switching to the TOP menu screen described later, and in the present embodiment, during display of the customer waiting screen in the image display unit 6, When a predetermined operation is performed on the effect button 37 while the demonstration effect screen to be described later is displayed, switching to the TOP menu screen is performed. In the present embodiment, when the customer waiting screen is being displayed, the continuous effect is being displayed, and the demonstration effect screen is being displayed, only the TOP menu switching operation is possible as button operation of the effect button 37. . However, even in these cases, the operation to the effect key 38 is possible (refer to steps S7207 to S7209 described later). If the determination in step S7192 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7194, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7193.

  In step S7193, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the elapsed time X after receiving the start instruction of the customer waiting process being counted has reached a predetermined time (60 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, it is determined whether or not a period during which no operation is performed has continued for 60 seconds since the customer waiting process was started. If the determination in step S7193 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7195. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7196.

  In step S7194, the CPU 501 counts the elapsed time being counted among the elapsed time X after receiving the instruction to start the customer waiting process and the elapsed time P after the continuation effect is executed in the customer waiting state. Reset to seconds to stop the counting operation. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7195.

  In step S7195, the CPU 501 causes the image display unit 6 to start displaying the TOP menu screen and starts counting the execution time Y of the display of the menu screen using the time-countable counter function, and thereafter, The processing proceeds to step S7196. Here, the TOP menu screen is a screen on which a menu selection screen including a plurality of menu items (for example, a “character selection” menu and a “real machine customization” menu) is displayed. Here, the menu selection screen corresponds to the menu item by the player operating the effect key 38 to select one of the menu items and operating the effect button 37 to determine the menu item. It is a screen which suggests that it can shift to a sub menu screen. In the present embodiment, when any menu item is determined from the TOP menu screen, transition is made to the submenu screen corresponding to the menu item, but in the following, the TOP menu screen and the submenu screen are grouped together. It is simply called a menu screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a TOP menu switching operation during display of the customer waiting screen or the continuous effect, or after receiving an instruction to start the customer waiting process (that is, the customer waiting screen is displayed) And when the period in which no operation is performed is continued for a predetermined time (60 seconds), the display is switched to the TOP menu screen.

  In step S7196, the CPU 501 determines whether the menu screen is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S7196 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7197. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7200. In the present embodiment, as the customer waiting process, the image display unit 6 displays one of the customer waiting screen, the continuation effect, the menu screen, and the demonstration effect screen described later. Therefore, when the determination in step S7191 is NO and the determination in step S7196 is NO, the image display unit 6 displays a demonstration effect screen.

  In step S7197, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a menu operation such as a menu item selection operation using the effect key 38 or a menu item determination operation using the effect button 37 has been performed on the menu screen. If the determination in step S7197 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7198. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7200.

  In step S7198, the CPU 501 displays a predetermined corresponding screen corresponding to the menu operation. For example, when the "return" operation is performed on the TOP menu screen, the TOP menu screen is displayed, and when the "decision" operation of the character is performed, a notification screen indicating that the character is determined is displayed. indicate. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7199.

  In step S7199, the CPU 501 resets the count of the execution time Y of the menu screen display to 0 seconds, and restarts the Y count operation. In addition, when the count of the elapsed time X after receiving the instruction to start the customer waiting process is not reset, it is reset to 0 seconds and the counting operation of X is stopped. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7200.

  In step S7200, the CPU 501 determines whether the elapsed time X from the reception start instruction of the customer waiting process being counted has reached a predetermined time (90 seconds in the present embodiment) or the menu display being counted is performed. It is determined whether the time Y has reached a predetermined time (90 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, after receiving the start instruction of the customer waiting process (after the customer waiting screen is displayed), a period during which no operation is performed is continued for 90 seconds, or the menu screen is displayed without performing any operation. It is determined whether the period of time has been continued for 90 seconds. If the determination in step S7200 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7201. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7203.

  In step S7201, the CPU 501 starts displaying a demonstration effect screen on the image display unit 6, and then the process proceeds to step S7202. Here, the demonstration effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image relating to the content (animation, a story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 for a predetermined time (for example, a playback time of 60 seconds) determined in advance. By the effect, it is suggested that the game is interrupted or ended, and the occurrence of burn-in (ghost image) of the still image on the image display unit 6 is prevented. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the menu operation is performed, the count of the execution time Y of the display of the menu screen is reset to 0 seconds, and the count is restarted from 0 seconds (see step S7199). Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the menu screen is displayed, the time during which the menu operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time (90 seconds) (that is, the non-operation period reaches the predetermined time) or the customer waiting screen is displayed. If a period during which no operation is performed is continued for a predetermined time (90 seconds), the screen is switched and displayed on the demonstration effect screen.

  In step S7202, the CPU 501 starts counting the execution time Z of the display of the demonstration effect screen using the counter function capable of measuring time, and resets the count of the execution time Y of the display of the menu screen to 0 seconds. , Y counting operation is stopped, or counting of elapsed time X after receiving a customer waiting process start instruction is not reset (that is, YES in step S7193 and NO in step S7197). Resets to 0 seconds and stops the X counting operation. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7203.

  In step S7203, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the TOP menu switching operation has been performed while the demonstration effect screen is being displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the TOP menu switching operation can be performed as the button operation of the effect button 37 while the demonstration effect screen is displayed. If the determination in step S7203 is YES, processing proceeds to step S7205, and if this determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S7204.

  In step S7204, the CPU 501 determines whether the execution time Z of the counted demonstration effect screen display has reached a predetermined time (60 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, it is determined whether the demonstration effect screen is continuously displayed for 60 seconds. If the determination in step S7204 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7205. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7207.

  In step S7205, the CPU 501 starts displaying the TOP menu screen on the image display unit 6, and then the process proceeds to step S7206. That is, in the present embodiment, when there is a TOP menu switching operation while the demonstration effect screen is displayed, or when the display time of the demonstration effect screen reaches a predetermined time (60 seconds), the TOP menu screen is switched and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the display time of the demonstration effect screen reaches the predetermined time (60 seconds), it is switched and displayed on the TOP menu screen, but it may be switched and displayed on the customer waiting screen.

  In step S7206, the CPU 501 starts counting the execution time Y of the menu screen display and resets the count of the execution time Z of the demonstration effect screen display to 0 seconds using the time-countable counter function. , Z stop counting operation. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7207.

  In step S7207, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a screen other than the menu screen (that is, a screen for waiting for a customer, a screen for continuous effect, a screen for demonstration effect) is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S7207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7208. If this determination is NO, the waiting-for-customer switching process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 48 is repeated again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Run.

  In step S7208, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S7208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7209. If this determination is NO, the customer waiting switching process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 48 is repeated again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Run.

  In step S7209, the CPU 501 changes the set volume level in accordance with the operation of the left and right keys of the effect key 38. Specifically, the CPU 501 reduces the volume level by one step until the volume level reaches the minimum level (for example, one step) each time the left key of the effect key 38 is pressed once, and the volume is generated each time the right key is pressed once. The level is raised by one step until the maximum level (for example, 10 levels) is reached, and the volume level is stored in the RAM 503 as a set volume level. Thus, when the effect sound is output by the image sound control unit 500, the volume of the effect sound is output at the set volume level stored in the RAM 503. Then, the customer waiting switching process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 48 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In the above description, the TOP menu switching operation can be performed even when the continuous effect is being performed, and the switching to the TOP menu screen is performed. However, when the continuous effect is being performed, the TOP is performed. The menu switching operation may not be performed, and switching to the TOP menu screen may not be performed. In the above description, the set volume level can be changed using the left and right keys of the effect key 38 when the menu screen is not displayed, but the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are also displayed when the menu screen is displayed The set volume level may be changed using Further, a menu screen for changing the set volume level may be displayed.

[Render execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect execution process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on an instruction to execute notification effect from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S901 in FIG. 50, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 determines whether or not an instruction to execute a notification effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S901 is YES, the process proceeds to step S902. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S902, the CPU 501 sets the rendering state based on the rendering state and the rendering content set according to the notification rendering execution instruction received in step S901, and the execution timing, execution time, and the like of the configured preview rendering. Set the production schedule. In addition, by setting the effect state, the effect contents of the non-interlocking effect (exclusive effect after impact, selection effect in the probability variation gaming state) to be described later are set, and the effect schedule to be described later by setting the effect schedule The contents of the presentation (selected play reach effect, partial play reach effect, development judgment effect, pseudo continuous effect, post-dump variation effect, steady change effect, RTC-based change effect) are set. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect state is set by the process of step S902. If the determination in step S903 is YES, the process proceeds to step S904, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S904, the CPU 501 performs non-interlocking effect execution processing for executing a selected effect in the special effect after the impact in the time saving game state after winning the impact jackpot or in the probability change gaming state. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S904. In addition, although it becomes clear by the later-mentioned explanation, the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state is the effect which is executed without being interlocked with the notification effect (variation effect) which is executed along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, Since the special effects after time are effects that are performed without being interlocked with the informing effect (varying effect) that is executed along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol at the time of losing, these effects are referred to as non-interactive effects Do. In addition, the special effect after a collision is interlocked with the informing effect (the fluctuation effect) which is executed along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol at the time of hitting. The details of the non-interlocking effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S905, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect has been set by the process of step S902. If the determination in step S905 is YES, the process proceeds to step S906. If the determination is NO, the effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S906, the CPU 501 performs a fluctuation effect execution process of executing a fluctuation effect to be executed along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The details of the variation presentation execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Non-linked production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the non-interlocking effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the non-interlocking effect execution process of step S904 in FIG.

  In step S9041 in FIG. 51, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect state set by the process in step S902 in FIG. 50 is the effect state 1. If the determination in step S9041 is YES, processing proceeds to step S9042, and if this determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S9046.

  In step S9042, the CPU 501 determines whether a button determination operation has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, 8.0 seconds) in which a button operation can be performed. If the determination in step S9042 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9043. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9044. Although the description has been simplified, at this time, the CPU 501 displays a screen for selecting a plurality of replacement update effects in the image display unit 6 so that the replacement update effects can be selected by a button determination operation (described later) See (1) in FIG. 74).

  In step S9043, the CPU 501 sets one of the five replacement update effects in the RAM 503 in accordance with the button determination operation. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S9044.

  In step S9044, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 8.0 seconds from the start of fluctuation) in which the above-described button operation can be performed has elapsed. If the determination in step S9044 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9045, and if the determination is NO, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. Do.

  In step S9045, the CPU 501 sets the replacement update effect set in the RAM 503 as a special effect after a collision, and starts the special effect after the collision in the image display unit 6. Then, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player-only effect is selected by the player from among the replacement update effects (that is, the theater effects of category A). In addition, although the details will become clear by the description given later, this special effect after the crash (that is, theatrical effect of category A) is an effect of 60 seconds in total length (see (1) in FIG. 67 described later) It starts when the specified time (8.0 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the first rotation in the time reduction gaming state after the time big hit (that is, it is displayed on the image display unit 6). Note that it is possible for the player to select an exclusive effect after a collision by using 8.0 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first rotation. In addition, as will become apparent from the following description, the 60 seconds special effects after a collision are a part of the currently set replacement update effects in the first rotation change display in the time reduction gaming state after a collision big hit. Time-limited game of 30 times by starting with the lapse of a prescribed time (8.0 seconds from the start of fluctuation; hereinafter sometimes referred to as the selection time) when button operation for selecting dedicated effects after time is possible The state ends and ends (see (1) in FIG. 73 described later). In the present embodiment, as described above, in the first rotation change display in the short time game state after the big hit, a selection time is provided to enable button operation for selecting a dedicated effect after the big shot. However, this selection time may be provided during a round effect for a big hit. In this case, the replacement update effect set in the RAM 503 during this round effect is started as the exclusive effect after the impact as the first rotation of the variable display in the time saving game state after the big hit is started. (That is, displayed on the image display unit 6). Further, in this case, since it is not necessary to provide the selection time (8.0 seconds) in the first rotation fluctuation display, the fluctuation pattern of the first rotation shown in FIG. The number may be "60.00 seconds" which is the same as "2-6 times", and in the case of a loss, it may be 1.50 seconds which is the same as "2-30 times".

  In step S9046, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect state set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 is the effect state 2. If the determination in step S9046 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9047. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9050.

  In step S9047, the CPU 501 determines whether or not dedicated rendering is suspended after a collision. If the determination in step S9047 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9048. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9049.

  In step S9048, the CPU 501 resumes the exclusive effect after the collision which has been interrupted. Then, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S9049, the CPU 501 continues the dedicated presentation after the collision. Then, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S9050, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect state set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 is effect state 3. If the determination in step S9050 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9051, and if this determination is NO, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. Do.

  In step S9051, the CPU 501 continuously executes the selection effect (additional update effect) set in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9052.

  In step S9052, the CPU 501 executes an effect selection process. Since the effect selection process is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 47, the description thereof is omitted. By this process, in the effect state 3 (that is, the probability variation gaming state), it is possible to set an effect desired to be viewed from among the additional update effects as a selected effect. Then, the non-interlocking effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. In addition, the outline of the effect of the exclusive effect after the collision will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, and the outline of the effect of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described later with reference to FIGS.

[Variation production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation presentation execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation effect execution process of step S906 in FIG.

  In step S9061 of FIG. 52, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content schedule-set by the process of step S902 of FIG. 50 includes a selected theater reach effect. Here, in the selected play reach effect, the play effect selected by the player from among the replacement update effects (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 is SPSP reach effect (fourth SPSP reach effect). It refers to the effect to be performed. Note that the presentation outline of this selected play reach presentation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. If the determination in step S9061 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9062, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9063.

  In step S9062, the CPU 501 executes selected play reach effect. The details of the selected play reach effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9063.

  In step S9063, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content schedule-set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 includes partial theater reach effect. Here, the partial theater reach effect is an effect in which a part (for example, “A-4”) of any of the replacement update effects (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 is executed as the SP reach effect. Say Note that an outline of this partial theater reach effect presentation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. If the determination in step S9063 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9064, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9065.

  In step S9064, the CPU 501 executes a partial theater reach effect. The details of the partial play reach effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9065.

  In step S9065, the CPU 501 determines whether the effect contents scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 include a development determination effect accompanied by a determination as to whether or not the subsequent effect develops (is continued) or not. Determine Specifically, although described later with reference to FIG. 69, the development determination effect is a production with a total length of 80 seconds, and all of the development determination effects with a total length of 80 seconds (full version) is a short time game after a single hit Used as a full special effect to be executed as the 4th SPSP reach effect in the state, the first 30 seconds (short version) of this development decision effect with a total length of 80 seconds is SP reach effect in the short time gaming state after a single hit It is used as a short special rendition to be implemented as. In addition, as described above, since the short special effect is the same as the effect of the first half of the full special effect, at the time the short special effect is started, is the short special effect being executed (that is, It is not known whether the development judgment effect is performed) or whether the full special effect is performed (that is, the development judgment effect of the second half is performed). That is, by executing the full version or the short version of the development determination effect, it is asked whether or not to develop to the subsequent effect. The outline of the effect of this development determination effect (short special effect, full special effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. If the determination in step S9065 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9066. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9067.

  In step S9066, the CPU 501 executes a development determination effect. The details of this development determination effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9066.

  In step S9067, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content schedule-set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 includes a pseudo-series effect. Note that the outline of the effect of this pseudo-series effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. If the determination in step S9067 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9068. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9069.

  In step S9068, the CPU 501 executes a pseudo-simulation effect. The details of this pseudo-series effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9069.

  In step S9069, the CPU 501 performs variation effects (hereinafter referred to as "after-after-change effects") when the effect contents scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. To determine whether or not the In addition, the outline of the effect of the dedicated effect after the collision (and the fluctuation effect after the impact) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. If the determination in step S9069 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9070. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9071.

  In step S9070, the CPU 501 executes post-accident change presentation. In addition, the details of this post-accident response presentation execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9071.

  In step S 9071, the CPU 501 performs variation effects when the selected content in the probability variation gaming state where non-interlocking effects are selected as the effect contents scheduled by the process of step S 902 in FIG. To determine whether or not the In addition, an outline of effects of the selection effect (and the probability change fluctuation effect) in the probability variation gaming state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. If the determination in step S9071 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9072, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9073.

  In step S <b> 9072, the CPU 501 executes the probability variation middle variation representation. In addition, the details of the probability variation middle variation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S9073.

  In step S <b> 9073, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect contents set in the schedule in the process of step S <b> 902 in FIG. 50 include an RTC compatible change effect corresponding to the RTC effect. The outline of the effect of the RTC effect (and the effect corresponding to the RTC) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. If the determination in step S9073 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9074, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S <b> 9074, the CPU 501 executes an RTC compatible change presentation. The details of the RTC compatible change presentation execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the variation effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S 9075, the CPU 501 executes other effects other than the above-described effects. Physically, the CPU 501 causes the image display unit 6 to execute, at the scheduled execution timing, the effects of the other effects set for schedule setting by the process of step S902 in FIG. Then, the variation effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Selected play reach production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the selected theater reach effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the selected theater reach effect execution process of step S9062 of FIG.

  In step S1401 in FIG. 53, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) in FIG. 68 described later) scheduled by the process of step S902 in . If the determination in step S1401 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1402, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Specifically, the CPU 501 causes the image display unit 6 to scroll and display the decorative symbols DI in the up and down direction, thereby transitioning and displaying the outcome (numeric symbols). Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a chance eye formation timing of the decorative symbol DI in the variable display set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 has been set. In addition, the chance eye establishment shows that three decorative symbols DI are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific symbol pattern (in the embodiment, “1” “2” “3”; see (2B) in FIG. When a chance is established, it is suggested to develop into a subsequent presentation (development presentation), but in the selection theater reach presentation execution processing, the selected theater reach presentation is executed as this development presentation. If the determination in step S1403 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1404. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1404, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be temporarily stopped at the chance eye. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is a period of theatrical performance selection set by the process of step S902 in FIG. Here, the term of the theater effect selection indicates a period in which the player can select a theater effect to be executed as the selected theater reach effect before the above-described selected theater reach effect is executed. If the determination in step S1405 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1406. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1406, the CPU 501 displays a reach selection screen (see (3) in FIG. 68 described later) for selecting the play effect to be executed as the selected play reach effect. In addition, the theater effects that can be selected on this reach selection screen are replacement renewal effects specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 (for example, if the phase of the category A is 7, the theater effects “A-3” 7 ").

  In step S1407, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the player's operation on the effect button 37 (operation for selecting a play effect) has been made within a predetermined period. If the determination in step S1407 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1408. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the CPU 501 sets the selected play effects in the RAM 503 as selected play reach effects. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1409, the CPU 501 sets an initial effect (for example, the oldest updated play effect of the replacement update effects; for example, "A-3") in the RAM 503 as a selected play reach effect. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the selected theater reach effect set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1410 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1411, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1411, the CPU 501 starts the play effect set in the RAM 503 as the selected play reach effect in the full version. Specifically, although described later with reference to FIG. 67, the play effect (that is, replacement update effect) set as the selected play reach effect is an effect with a full length of 60 seconds, and the CPU 501 controls the full length of 60 seconds. Perform the production from the beginning to the end. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing of notifying the big hit result) of the decorative symbol scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1412 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9063 of FIG.

  In step S1413, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or loss by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI at least partially changing with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and ends the selected play reach effect, and thereafter, the production control By receiving the symbol determination command via the unit 400, the display is made to stop and display with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. Specifically, the CPU 501 causes all three decorative symbols DI in the image display unit 6 to be a big hit symbol in the case of a big hit, so-called Zoro eyes (for example, appearing items "1", "1", "1" In the case of a loss, a temporary stop display is made with so-called loose eyes (for example, the appearances “1” “2” “1”), and then a final stop display is made. Then, the selected play reach effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9063 in FIG.

[Partial theater reach production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a partial theater reach effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the partial play reach effect execution process of step S9064 of FIG.

  In step S1501 of FIG. 54, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of variation display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. . If the determination in step S1501 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1502, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach eye formation timing of the decorative symbol DI during the variable display, which is set by the process of step S902 in FIG. In addition, with reach eye formation, the two decorative designs except for the decorative design to be stopped last among the three decorative designs DI have the same appearance (for example, “2”; see (2A in FIG. 68)). It indicates that temporary stop display is to be made (so-called reach state) and if reach is established, it is suggested that it will develop into the following effect (development effect), but in the partial theater reach effect execution processing, this development effect As part theater reach production is performed. If the determination in step S1503 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1504, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1504, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be displayed on the reach eye temporarily. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the partial theater reach effect set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1505 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1506. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1506, the CPU 501 starts one theater effect (for example, “A-4”) determined from among the replacement update effects specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 as a partial play reach effect in the short version. . Specifically, although described later with reference to FIG. 67, the play effect (that is, replacement update effect) set as the partial play reach effect is an effect with a full length of 60 seconds, but the CPU 501 does this full length of 60 seconds The effect of is performed from the middle (for example, 30 seconds after the start) to the end. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing of notifying the big hit result) of the decorative symbol set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1507 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1508. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9063 of FIG.

  In step S1508, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or loss by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI in which at least a part is fluctuating with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and ends the partial theater reach effect, and then, the production control By receiving the symbol determination command via the unit 400, the display is made to stop and display with the big hit symbol or lost symbol. Then, the partial play reach effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S9065 in FIG.

[Development judgment effect execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the development determination effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the evolution determination effect executing process of step S9066 of FIG.

  In step S1601 of FIG. 55, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 70 described later) set by the process of step S902 of FIG. . If the determination in step S1601 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1602. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1602, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach eye formation timing of the decorative symbol DI during the variable display, which is set by the process of step S902 in FIG. It should be noted that when reach is established, it is suggested to develop to the subsequent presentation (development presentation), but in the development judgment presentation execution process, the development judgment presentation as the development presentation (a short special presentation of a short version shown in FIG. 69 or A full version of the full special rendition) is executed. If the determination in step S1603 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1604. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1605.

  In step S1604, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be displayed on the reach eye temporarily. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1605.

  In step S1605, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is a start timing of the development determination effect (short special effect or full special effect) set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1605 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1606. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1606, the CPU 501 starts short special rendition or full special rendition as a development determination effect. In addition, specifically, although it mentions later with reference to FIG. 69, since short special production is the same as the first half of full special production, any development is executed when development judgment production is started I do not know if Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the progress determination notification timing set by the process of step S902 in FIG. Here, the development determination notification timing is a timing to notify whether the development determination effect is developed in the second half (that is, whether the development determination effect being executed is the short version or the full version), To the timing at which the player operated the effect button 37 within the predetermined button operation effective period, or when the player does not operate the effect button 37 within the operation effective period, the operation It is the timing when the effective period has expired. If the determination in step S1607 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1608. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1608, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the development determination effect being executed can be developed (that is, whether it is a full special effect). If the determination in step S1608 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1609. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1610.

  In step S1609, the CPU 501 continuously executes the progress determination effect under execution (that is, full special effect). At this time, a continuous notification effect for notifying that it is continued is executed by overwrite processing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1610, the CPU 501 ends the progress determination effect under execution (that is, the short special effect). More specifically, the short special effect is ended by replacing (or overwriting) the short special effect being executed with the informing effect of notifying the result of the drop. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1611. In the process of step S1607, since the timing at which the determination in step S1607 is YES differs depending on the timing at which the player operates the rendering button 37 (or not performed), the difference in this timing is adjusted. For this reason, a predetermined grace period (adjustment time of the effect measure) may be provided by the end of the progress determination effect being executed (replaced with the notification effect of notifying a drop). For example, in the development judgment effect, in the predetermined button operation valid period, the still screen is such that the progress of the effect is paused, and the operation of the effect button 37 is performed until the button operation valid period expires. In the period (remaining time) of, for example, the scale may be adjusted by displaying a blackout screen. Alternatively, when the determination effect under execution is ended at the timing when the operation of the effect button 37 is performed, the above-mentioned remaining time is adjusted by adjusting the time scale for temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI thereafter. It is good also as things. Similarly, in the process of step S1609 described above, adjustment of the remaining time may be performed, and during the button operation valid period, the still screen is displayed as the development determination effect, and the operation of the effect button 37 is performed. The still screen changes at the specified timing, the continuation notification effect is executed, and the development judgment effect proceeds, and the adjustment of the above-mentioned remaining time is performed by adjusting the time scale for displaying the decorative symbol DI temporarily thereafter. It may be

  In step S1611, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing of notifying the big hit result) of the decorative symbol set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1611 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1612, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9067 of FIG.

  In step S1612, the CPU 501 displays a large hit or lost temporary stop indication by displaying the decorative symbol DI at least a part of which is fluctuating temporarily with a big hit symbol or a lost symbol, and ends the development determination effect, and then the effect control unit By receiving the symbol determination command via 400, the confirmation display is stopped with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the development determination effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9067 in FIG. 52.

[Pseudo rendition execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the pseudo continuous effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous effect execution process of step S9068 of FIG.

  In step S1701 of FIG. 56, the CPU 501 displays the start timing (or temporary temporary stop display) of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 72 described later) set by the process of step S902 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the start timing of the re-variation display of the decorative symbol). If the determination in step S1701 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1702. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1702, the CPU 501 starts the fluctuation display (or the re-variation display) of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S 1703, the CPU 501 performs pseudo-series symbol (real implementation) of the decorative symbol (the symbol in the center) displayed at the end of the temporary display among the decorative symbols DI in the variable display set by the process of step S 902 in FIG. In the form, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display a temporary stop with "7" (see (2) in FIG. 72). In addition, it is suggested that the decorative symbol DI will be variably displayed again when the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. If the determination in step S1703 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1704. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1705.

  In step S1704, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed with a pseudo continuous symbol. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1705.

  In step S1705, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach eye formation timing of the decorative symbol DI during the variable display, which is set by the process of step S902 in FIG. In addition, it is suggested that the possibility that it will develop to subsequent presentation (development presentation) is so high that the reach eye is established, and the number of times that the pseudo linked symbol has been temporarily stopped is increased. If the determination in step S1705 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1706. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1706, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be displayed on the reach eye temporarily. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1707, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the development effect schedule-set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1707 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1708. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  In step S1708, the CPU 501 starts the development effect. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1709.

  In step S1709, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol schedule set by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 (that is, the result notification timing of notifying the big hit result). If the determination in step S1709 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1710. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9069 of FIG.

  In step S1710, the CPU 501 makes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol temporarily stop display of the decorative symbol DI at least a part of which is fluctuating, thereby notifying a big hit or loss and performing a development effect. The development effect is finished, and then, by receiving the symbol determination command via the effect control unit 400, the display is made to display the determination stop with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the pseudo series effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9069 in FIG. 52.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned simulated rendition execution process, the pseudo rendition is executed by temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol (the symbol at the center) of the decorative symbols DI, which is temporarily displayed at temporary stop. An example was explained, but in addition to this, it is said that the decorative symbol (the symbol in the center) to be displayed temporarily at the end of the temporary stop is temporarily stopped by the pseudo run symbol, and actually it is displayed at the stop by the pseudo run symbol Instead, an effect (so-called pseudo linked effect) may be performed in which the user is informed of a loss.

[Post-dump variation production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, post-collision variation effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the after-after-time variation effect execution process of step S 9070 of FIG. 52.

  In step S1801 of FIG. 57, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 74 described later) set by the process of step S902 of FIG. . If the determination in step S1801 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1802. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1802, the CPU 501 reduces the display of the decorative symbol DI and starts its variable display. Specifically, in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 performs the scroll variation display of each of the reduced-displayed decorative symbols DI in the up and down direction to transitionally display the outcome (numeric symbols). The reason that the decorative symbol DI is displayed in a reduced size in the image display unit 6 in this manner is to prevent the exclusive effect after the collision displayed on the image display unit 6 in the non-interlocking effect execution process shown in FIG. (See (2) in FIG. 74). Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the post-accident post-change variation presentation being executed corresponds to a big hit. If the determination in step S1803 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1804. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1804, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is a pseudo stop timing of the decorative symbol DI which has been set by the process of step S902 in FIG. Here, the pseudo stop is to start the variation display again after the decorative symbol DI is temporarily stopped at the missing eye, and repeating this pseudo stop, in fact, the fluctuation in one special symbol lottery Although it is a display, it can be visually recognized as if a plurality of special symbol lottery has been executed. If the determination in step S1804 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1805. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1806.

  In step S1805, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be temporarily stopped at the missing eye (lost symbol), and then starts variable display again. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1806.

  In step S1806, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the big hit notification timing set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1806 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1807. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1807, the CPU 501 executes the jackpot notification effect by replacing (or overwriting) the special effect after collision displayed on the image display unit 6 in the non-interlocking effect execution process shown in FIG. 51 in the image display unit 6 Do. Specifically, the CPU 501 executes, as a big hit notification effect, an effect that determines the effect of the play effect as “o” in association with the special effect (play effect) that has already been executed, as the big hit notification effect (FIG. 74 (6)). Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1808, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing of step S902 in FIG. 50 (that is, the result notification timing for notifying the big hit result). If the determination in step S1808 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1809. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9071 of FIG.

  In step S1809, the CPU 501 reports a big hit or loss by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI in which at least a part is fluctuating with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and then, through the effect control unit 400, the symbol determination command By receiving, the decision stop display is made with the big hit symbol or the missing symbol. Then, the after-accident variation effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9071 in FIG.

[Permanent variation variation production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the probability variation middle variation effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the process of performing random variation during time presentation processing of step S9072 in FIG.

  In step S1901 in FIG. 58, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) in FIG. 76 described later) set by the process of step S902 in FIG. . If the determination in step S1901 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1902. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1902, the CPU 501 reduces and displays the decorative symbol DI, and starts its variable display. Specifically, in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 performs the scroll variation display of each of the reduced-displayed decorative symbols DI in the up and down direction to transitionally display the outcome (numeric symbols). In addition, the reason that the decorative symbol DI is displayed in a reduced size in the image display unit 6 in this way is because it does not disturb the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state displayed on the image display unit 6 in the non-linkage effect execution process shown in FIG. (See (1) in FIG. 76). Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing of notifying the big hit result) of the decorative symbol scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1808 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1904. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9073 of FIG.

  In step S1904, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or loss by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI in which at least a part is fluctuating with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and then, through the effect control unit 400, the symbol determination command By receiving, the decision stop display is made with the big hit symbol or the missing symbol. Then, the process of performing the probability variation change effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9073 in FIG.

[RTC compatible fluctuation production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, an RTC-based variation production effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the RTC corresponding change presentation execution process of step S <b> 9074 of FIG. 52.

  In step S2001 of FIG. 59, the CPU 501 starts timing of variation display of the decorative symbol DI (see (2) of FIG. 62 and (2) of FIG. 64 described later) set by the process of step S902 of FIG. Determine if there is. If the determination in step S2001 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2002, the CPU 501 reduces and displays the decorative symbol DI, and starts its variable display. Specifically, in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 performs the scroll variation display of each of the reduced-displayed decorative symbols DI in the up and down direction to transitionally display the outcome (numeric symbols). The reason why the decorative symbol DI is displayed in a reduced size in the image display unit 6 in this way is to prevent the RTC effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. (2) and (2) in FIG. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the RTC interlocking notice effect set by the process of step S902 in FIG. The RTC interlocking advance notice effect is, as described above, an effect that can be executed when the second RTC effect is executed in the image display unit 6, and the variation pattern (RTC compatible) according to the contents of the effect of the second RTC effect It is a notice effect performed a predetermined number of times according to the effect time of the fluctuation effect, and specifically, it is an effect in which a game character capable of acquiring game points by defeating appears (see (3) in FIG. 64). . If the determination in step S2003 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC corresponding change presentation being executed is a presentation corresponding to a big hit. If the determination in step S2005 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2006, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the big hit notification timing set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S2006 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2007, the CPU 501 substitutes (or overwrites) the RTC effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. 40 in the image display unit 6, and executes the jackpot notification effect. Specifically, when the first RTC effect or the replacement effect is displayed in the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 replaces the end effect scheduled as the RTC effect and notifies the big hit with a congratulation effect (FIG. (5A) (refer to (6) in FIG. 62) for notifying the big hit after the end effect is executed. On the other hand, when the second RTC effect is displayed in the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 replaces the end effect scheduled as the RTC effect and reports a big hit (see (4A) in FIG. 64). And an extended game effect (see (5) in FIG. 64) for notifying of a big hit after the end effect. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing for notifying the big hit result) of the decorative symbol scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S2008 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2009. If the determination is NO, the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S2009, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or loss by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol DI in which at least a part is fluctuating with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and then, through the effect control unit 400, the symbol determination command By receiving, the decision stop display is made with the big hit symbol or the missing symbol. Then, the RTC corresponding variation presentation execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  This is the end of the description of the timer interrupt process by the image and sound control unit 500. Next, an outline of various effects unique to the present embodiment, which are realized by the timer interrupt process by the image sound control unit 500 described above, will be described.

[Various production summary]
[1st RTC production / replacement production summary]
First, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, an outline of the first RTC effect and the exchange effect will be described. The first RTC effect and the replacement effect are mainly realized by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 41, 48, and 59. Moreover, since only the presence or absence of the exchange notification differs between the first RTC effect and the exchange effect, the exchange effect having the exchange notification will be described as an example, and the description of the first RTC effect will be simplified. Here, as described above, the exchange effect is an effect that indicates that a part of the theater effect has been updated to the latest one, but it is updated to be the latest with the preparation effect of 30 seconds that is initially executed A 60-second show production with a total of 60 seconds of play production is shown, a 10-second judgment production to judge whether it is a big hit in relation to the show production, and a notification of which play production has been updated to the latest It is a series of effects which consists of 10 seconds of exchange notices to be performed and 10 seconds of end effects which show that exchange effect is ended (refer to (1) of Drawing 61). In some cases, the effect time of the end effect may be extended (see (5) in FIG. 61), or the extension effect may be executed after the end effect is completed (see (7) in FIG. 61). In the following, the exchange effect at 20: 000 (see FIG. 32) on Tuesday, the ninth day after operation will be specifically described as an example.

  First, as shown in (1) of FIG. 61, for example, as in the customer waiting state, when the timing at which the RTC effect (replacement effect) starts is reached, the case is described where the variation pre-start effect is not executed Do. In this case, first, as a preparation effect, an effect notifying that the RTC effect starts is performed for 30 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (1) in FIG. 62). Next, as the show effect, the latest updated theater effect (in this example, A-6) is executed for 60 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (2) in FIG. 62). Next, as a judgment effect, an effect indicating whether or not a big hit is made on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 for 10 seconds by determining whether the effect content of the show effect is good (o) or bad (x) as the judgment effect. (See (3) in FIG. 62). Next, as an exchange notification, it is shown what the latest updated theater effect is (in this example, it indicates that A-6 has been updated among the theater effects of category A) and the effect is that of the image display unit 6 It is executed for 10 seconds on the entire screen (see (4) in FIG. 62). Finally, as the end effect, the exchange effect ends, and an effect of notifying when the next RTC effect is performed is performed for 10 seconds (see (5) in FIG. 62).

  Next, as shown in (2) to (4) of FIG. 61, when it is time to start the RTC effect (replacement effect), the fluctuation effect is being executed (that is, the fluctuation effect before RTC start is executed) The start of the RTC effect in the case where the In this case, the preparation effect is formed by cutting off a portion of the lower left area of the entire screen of the image display unit 6 so as not to disturb the pre-RTC start fluctuation effect currently being executed in the image display unit 6. Wipe display is performed in the wipe area 6w (see (1A) in FIG. 62). Then, when the pre-RTC variation presentation ends, the RTC presentation (replacement presentation) is executed by switching from the wipe display to the full screen display. Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 61, when the pre-RTC change presentation (duration change presentation) ends while the preparation presentation is being performed, the display is switched to the full screen in the middle of the preparation presentation. On the other hand, as shown in (3) of FIG. 61, when the pre-RTC variation presentation does not end during the preparation presentation, the subsequent presentation presentation is also wiped in the wipe area 6w, and the pre-RTC variation presentation ( After the end of the loss change effect), the display is switched to full screen display. When the RTC effect (replacement effect) is displayed on the full screen, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner as the RTC compatible change effect. On the other hand, as shown in (4) of FIG. 61, when the RTC effect (replacement effect) is to be started, if the pre-RTC start fluctuation effect being executed is a big hit, before the RTC start. Since the big hit effect is started when the change effect is finished, the RTC effect (replacement effect) is continuously wiped and displayed in the wipe area 6w so as not to disturb the big hit effect. In addition, when the big hit effect is being executed at the timing when the RTC effect (replacement effect) is started, the RTC effect (exchange effect) continues until the big hit effect is finished so as not to prevent the big hit effect. Wipe display is performed in the wipe area 6w.

  Next, as shown in (5) to (7) of FIG. 61, when it is time to finish the RTC effect (replacement effect), the fluctuation effect is being executed (that is, the RTC compatible fluctuation effect is being executed) The end of the RTC effect in the case of) will be described. In this case, the RTC effect (replacement effect) is ended according to the end timing of the RTC compatible fluctuation effect currently being executed in the image display unit 6. Specifically, as shown in (5) of FIG. 61, when the RTC corresponding change presentation being executed is a loss, extend the execution time of the end presentation until the timing when the RTC correspondence change presentation ends. Thus, the RTC effect is ended at the timing when the RTC compatible change effect is ended. On the other hand, as shown in (6) of FIG. 61, when the RTC compatible change presentation started before the determination presentation is a big hit, a determination presentation showing a big hit in the determination presentation (the presentation content of the show presentation is good After the replacement notification is performed, the end effect is replaced with a congratulation effect, and a congratulation effect of notifying that it is a big hit until the timing when the RTC compatible change effect is finished is performed. It is executed (see (5A) in FIG. 62). On the other hand, as shown in (7) of FIG. 61, when the RTC compatible change presentation started after the determination presentation is a big hit, a determination presentation showing a loss in the determination presentation (the presentation content of the show presentation is bad Since the display of x) is performed, after the end effect is finished, an extension effect indicating that it is a resurrection hit is executed until the timing when the RTC compatible change effect is finished, and the big effect in the extension effect It is reported that there is (see (6) in FIG. 62). In addition, when the congratulation effect or the extension effect is finished, the RTC effect is finished, and the big hit effect is executed.

  In the first RTC effect, the exchange notification is not executed in the above-described exchange effect (for example, the end effect is executed instead of the exchange notification, or the time of the RTC effect is shortened only by the time of the exchange notification) The point is different. That is, the exchange notification indicating which play effect has been updated is performed only at the third set time when the exchange effect is performed, and is not performed at the first set time.

[The second RTC production summary]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, an outline of the second RTC effect will be described. The second RTC effect is realized mainly by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. 42, FIG. 48, and FIG. As described above, the second RTC effect is a game effect, but it is possible to obtain game points for the first 30 seconds of the preparation effect and 80 seconds for which the player can obtain game points by operating the effect button 37 or the like. This is a series of effects including a simultaneous game effect and a 10-second end effect indicating that the simultaneous game effect ends (see (1) in FIG. 63). In some cases, the effect time of the end effect is extended (see (5) in FIG. 63), or the extension game effect may be executed after the end effect is completed (see (7) in FIG. 63). . Hereinafter, the second RTC effect at 12:30 on a certain day of the week will be specifically described by way of example.

  First, as shown in (1) of FIG. 63, for example, as in the customer waiting state, when the RTC presentation (the second RTC presentation) is timed to be started and the variation presentation before the start of RTC is not executed. explain. In this case, first, as a preparation effect, an effect notifying that the RTC effect starts is performed for 30 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (1) in FIG. 64). Next, as a simultaneous game effect, for example, a rocket appears, and the player continuously hits the effect button 37 or the like to give damage to the rocket. The screen is executed for 60 seconds (see (2) in FIG. 64). Next, as the end effect, the game points acquired in the simultaneous game effect are displayed, the second RTC effect is ended, and the effect of notifying when the next second RTC effect is performed is executed for 10 seconds ( See (3) in FIG. In addition, the acquired game point displayed at the time of the end effect does not reach 100 pt which is the highest value.

  Next, as shown in (2) to (4) of FIG. 63, when the timing to start the RTC effect (replacement effect) comes, the fluctuation effect is being executed (that is, the fluctuation effect before the start of the RTC is executed) The start of the RTC effect in the case where the In this case, the preparation effect is formed by cutting off a portion of the lower left area of the entire screen of the image display unit 6 so as not to disturb the pre-RTC start fluctuation effect currently being executed in the image display unit 6. Wipe display is performed in the wipe area 6w (see (1A) in FIG. 64). However, at the timing when the simultaneous game effect is started, the simultaneous game effect is displayed on the entire screen regardless of the end timing of the fluctuation effect before the start of the RTC. Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 63, when the pre-RTC start fluctuation effect (the shift fluctuation effect) is finished during the execution of the preparation effect, the switching display is performed on the entire screen during the preparation effect. The simultaneous game effect is displayed on the full screen. On the other hand, as shown in (3) of FIG. 63, when the pre-RTC variation presentation does not end during the preparation presentation, the second RTC presentation (preparation presentation) is wiped in the wipe area 6 w until the preparation presentation ends. Although it is displayed, when the simultaneous game effect is started, the simultaneous game effect is displayed on the full screen even if the pre-RTC change effect is not finished. However, at this time, the simultaneous game effect is displayed in a semi-transparent manner, whereby it is prevented that the pre-RTC start change effect (for example, SP reach) which is already being executed is interrupted (see (2A) in FIG. 64). Then, when the pre-RTC variation presentation ends, the display mode of the simultaneous game presentation switches from the semi-transparent display to the normal display (see (2) in FIG. 64). When the RTC effect (the second RTC effect) is normally displayed on the full screen (normal display that is not semi-transparent display), the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner as the RTC compatible change effect. . On the other hand, as shown in (4) of FIG. 63, when it is time to start the RTC effect (the second RTC effect), if the pre-RTC start fluctuation effect being executed is a big hit, the preparation effect is The second RTC effect (preparation effect) is wiped displayed in the wipe area 6 w until the end, and then the simultaneous game effect is displayed on the full screen in a semi-transparent display, but the second RTC effect is ended by the start of the jackpot effect . In the present embodiment, the second RTC effect is ended by the start of the jackpot effect, but before the start of the jackpot effect, for example, the timing for notifying the jackpot during the fluctuation effect (for example, The second RTC effect may be ended at the timing at which a big hit is notified by the operation of the movable part 7.

  Next, as shown in (5) to (7) of FIG. 63, when the RTC effect (the second RTC effect) is ended, the fluctuation effect is being executed (that is, the RTC compatible fluctuation effect is executed) The end of the RTC effect in the case where the In this case, the RTC effect (the second RTC effect) is ended according to the end timing of the RTC compatible fluctuation effect currently being executed in the image display unit 6. Specifically, as shown in (5) of FIG. 63, when the RTC corresponding change presentation being executed is a loss, extend the execution time of the end presentation until the timing when the RTC correspondence change presentation ends. Thus, the RTC effect is ended at the timing when the RTC compatible change effect is ended. On the other hand, as shown in (6) of FIG. 63, when the RTC corresponding change presentation started before the end presentation is a big hit, the end presentation is replaced with the game clear presentation, and the RTC correspondence change presentation is Until the end timing, a game clear effect notifying that it is a big hit is executed (see (3A) in FIG. 46). In the game clear effect, it is displayed that the highest value of 100 pt has been acquired as the game points acquired in the simultaneous game effect, and it is notified that a big hit is made. On the other hand, as shown in (7) of FIG. 63, when the RTC compatible variation presentation started during the termination presentation is a big hit, it can not be replaced with the game clearing presentation at the timing of the termination presentation, so the termination presentation is After the completion, the extended game effect is executed until the timing when the RTC compatible fluctuation effect ends, and the effect of succeeding the game in the extended game effect (for example, defeating the enemy) is executed, whereby the extended game effect is performed in a big hit. It is reported that there is (see (4) in FIG. 64). When the game clear effect or the extension game effect ends, the RTC effect ends, and the big hit effect is executed.

  By the way, as described above, in the plurality of gaming machines 1 (see FIG. 9) installed on one island in the pachinko hall, the time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. For this reason, the simultaneous game effect is simultaneously executed in a plurality of game machines 1, and even when the pre-RTC variation effect (SP reach etc.) is being executed, the plurality is displayed semitransparently and full screen displayed. It is possible to create a sense of unity that the game is started at the same timing all at once on the entire island consisting of the gaming machine 1 of FIG. In addition, simultaneous game effects are executed at the same timing (that is, rocket images shown in (2) of FIG. 64 are displayed at the same timing) in a plurality of gaming machines installed on one island. The rocket image is provided by providing a time difference between the timings to start between the adjacent gaming machines (that is, the timing when the rocket image is displayed) based on the identification number of the gaming machine stored in the non-volatile RAM 504. By making it appear as moving between adjacent game machines, it may be possible to create a sense of unity of the whole island.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as the RTC effects, a plurality of types of RTC effects (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, replacement update effect) are prepared, so only one type of RTC effect is executed. Compared to the case, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Further, among the plurality of types of RTC effects, the first RTC effect and the replacement update effect are executed regardless of the game state, while the second RTC effect is to limit the execution according to the game state (FIG. 33) reference). For this reason, as in the replacement update effect, an effect notifying that a new play effect has been updated can be notified to the player regardless of the game state, and as in the second RTC effect, By restricting the execution of game effects that are not necessarily notified to the player, other game effects such as during a big hit can be preferentially executed. That is, in the present embodiment, effective control can be realized by controlling execution of a plurality of types of RTC effects according to the types.

[Round production summary]
Next, the outline of the round effect will be described with reference to FIG. The round effect is mainly realized by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 65, the round effect in the jackpot game executed when the jackpots A to D are won will be described.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 65, when the big hit game is executed in the case of winning the big hit A, the non-selected effects (for example, related to the theme of the gaming machine) in the 1st to 7th eyes A predetermined PV (promotion video) effect is executed, and a V round effect is executed at the 8th R, which is a V round (VR). Then, while this V round effect is being performed, the effect image of the non-selected effect (PV effect) is not displayed. Note that the effect sound of the non-selected effect may be output when the V round effect is being performed (for example, the volume level may be reduced and output, etc.).

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 65, when a big hit game is executed in the case of winning a big hit B, non-selected effects (for example, in advance related to the theme of a gaming machine, etc.) A defined PV (promotion video) presentation is continuously executed.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 65, when a big hit game is executed in the case of winning a big hit C, it is shown that it is a non-selected effect (for example, it is a big hit at the time of the 1Rs to 8Rs round) Special effects are continuously executed.

  Next, the round effect during the jackpot game when the jackpot D is won will be described. If you win the big hit D, depending on whether it is a big hit from the normal gaming state (the so-called first hit) or a big hit from the time-saving state (the short game state or the odd change gaming state) , Different round production is performed.

  As shown in (4) of FIG. 65, when the big hit game is executed in the case of winning the big hit D from the normal gaming state, non-selected effects (for example, PV effects) in the 1st to 7th round effects. Is executed, and the V-round effect is executed at the 8th R which is the V-round (VR). Then, while this V round effect is being performed, the effect image of the non-selected effect (PV effect) is not displayed. Then, in the 9Rth round effect, the display of the effect image of the non-selected effect that has become non-display is resumed, and the non-selected effect is continued until the 16R-th. Although the effect image of the non-selected effect is not displayed while the V round effect is being executed, the non-selected effect is V, for example, because the output of the effect sound of the non-selected effect is continued, etc. Even during the round effect, the effect is progressing (though the effect image is not actually drawn). For this reason, when the display of the effect image of the non-selected effect is resumed in the 9Rth round effect, the effect image interrupted and displayed with the effect image displayed immediately before the start of the 8R eye is displayed.

  As shown in (5) of FIG. 65, when a big hit game when a big hit D is won from the time saving state is executed, in the 1st to 7th round effects, the selected effect (theatrical effect described above) is executed And the V-round effect is executed at the 8th R which is the V-round (VR). Then, while the V-round effect is being performed, the selection effect is paused, and the output of the effect image and the effect sound of the selection effect is paused. Then, in the 9Rth round effect, the output of the effect image and effect sound of the selected effect that has been temporarily stopped is resumed, and the selected effect is continued up to the 16Rth. Although the effect image and effect sound of the selected effect are not output while the V round effect is being executed, the paused state of this output is stored in the RAM 503, and the output of the selected effect in the 9Rth round effect When is resumed, it is resumed from this paused state, so that the selection effect continuous with the selection effect performed immediately before the start of the eighth R eye (without interruption) is resumed. By this, even if the execution of the selected effect selected by the player is restricted by the V round effect being executed, there is no possibility that a part of the effects of the selected effect will be missed and not executed. It is possible to adopt an effect having a series of flows as (that is, theatrical effect).

  In the present embodiment, the selection effect is temporarily stopped when the V round effect is performed, but may be displayed semi-transparently, for example. Even in this manner, since the selection effect can be visually recognized even during the V round effect, it is possible to entertain the player with a series of selection effects (theatrical effects) without interruption throughout the round in the big hit game .

[Summary of selection effects during the big hit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an outline of selection effects during a big hit game (selection of selection effects and execution of selection effects during V round effects) will be described. This selection effect is realized mainly by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. Also, the round effect shown in FIG. 66 indicates the round effect (see (5) in FIG. 65) executed in the big hit game when winning a big hit D from the time saving state.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 66, in the round effect for the 1R to 7R eyes, the selected effect is executed, but the player operates the left and right keys of the effect key 38 to make the right of the image display unit 6 The presentation selection screen is displayed on the side. In addition, the effect selection screen has the board surfaces which are slightly offset and overlap each other corresponding to each of the four categories A to D of the additional update effect, and each board has the name of the additional update effect in each category Are displayed in an array. The display of these four board faces suggests that there are a plurality of categories, and the names of additional update effects in the category of the top board face are displayed to allow a plurality of selections within the category. It is suggested that the item exists. Further, since the effect selection screen has such a configuration, it is possible to display many selection items divided into categories even if the display area is small. In addition, a cursor indicating which additional update effect is selected as the currently selected selected effect is displayed on the effect selection screen, and for example, the name “A-4” of the play effect is displayed in the cursor. Thus, it is shown that theatrical effect "A-4" is currently being executed on the left side of the effect selection screen.

  As described above, when the up and down key of the effect key 38 is operated while the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6, the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is transitionally displayed, as shown in FIG. As shown in (2A), for example, theatrical effect "A-5" is displayed. Then, the selection effect performed on the left side of the effect selection screen is switched from the theater effect "A-4" to "A-5", and when switched, the theater effect "A-5" is newly executed as the selected effect It is started.

  On the other hand, when the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display 6, if the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are operated, the board of the effect selection screen is switched (the board displayed at the top is switched). The category of the update effect is switched, and as shown in (2B) of FIG. And, at this time, in the cursor, in the additional update effect (“B-4”) of the category after switching corresponding to the number of the additional update effect (“A-4”) displayed in the category before switching The name is displayed. Then, the selection effect performed on the left side of the effect selection screen is switched from the theater effect "A-4" to "B-4", and when switched, the theater effect "B-4" is newly executed as the selected effect It is started.

  The selected effect (for example, “A-5”) selected as described above is executed for a specified time (for example, 60 seconds), and when the selected effect is finished, the following is performed according to the selected mode (for example, in-category sequential selection mode) The selection effect "A-6" is automatically selected and executed, and the execution of the selection effect is continued at the first to seventh R's. As described in (2A) and (2B) in FIG. 66, the player can reselect the selected effect by himself / herself at any time during execution of the selected effect. Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 66, immediately before the start of 8R (V round), theatrical effect "A-6" is executed as a selected effect, and the effect progresses to the time of the remaining "20 seconds" It shall have been.

  Next, as shown in (4) of FIG. 66, when 8R (V round) is started, the output of the selection effect is paused in the image display unit 6, and V round effect is executed instead, for example, A notification image is displayed to notify the V area 53 to win the game ball in this round. When the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6 immediately before 8R (V round) is started (see (3) in FIG. 66), the output of the selected effect is temporarily stopped. The effect selection screen is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in (5) of FIG. 66, when the 9Rth round effect is started, the output of the selected effect is resumed, and theatrical effect "A-6" that has progressed until just before the 8R start is The output is resumed from the paused state, that is, the play effect "A-6" is resumed from the remaining "20 seconds".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select the effect to be executed as the selected effect from the additional update effects by operating the effect key 38 etc., so the round effect in the big hit game is played It can be a presentation that the person is interested in. Further, since this additional update effect is additionally updated according to the elapse of the time indicated by the RTC 404 (in response to the phase update), the number of selectable effects selectable by the player is increased. Even for a player who has played a game, it is possible to maintain the interest. In addition, this V-round effect is limited (temporarily stopped) when the V-round effect is executed, but the output of the selected effect is resumed in the 9Rth-round effect after the V-round effect is finished. At the same time, by resuming from this paused state, there is no possibility that part of the effects of the selection effect will be missed and not executed. Therefore, by executing the V round effect, it is possible to appropriately notify that the V round is important for the player (which is a condition to be given a high certainty state), and the player has selected It is possible to show all the effects to the player without skipping a part of the selection effects. In addition, since the selected effects displayed during the big hit game in this way are not to be executed because some effects are dropped out, story effects etc. that are not suitable when interrupted may be used as the selected effects. It becomes possible.

  In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, such a selected effect selected during the round of the big hit game is after the big hit game (big hit game when the big hit D is won) is finished It is continuously executed even in the odd change gaming state of.

[Selected theater reach production / partial theater reach production summary]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, an overview of selected play reach presentation and partial play reach production will be described. The selected theater reach effect is mainly realized by the timer interrupt process by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. 53, and the partial theater reach effect is mainly realized by the timer interrupt process by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. Be done.

  First, the selected theater reach effect and the effect used as a partial theater reach effect will be described. The selected play reach effect is, as described above, an effect that can be selected by the player from among the replacement update effects (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, and more specifically, for example, When the phase of category A is updated to 7 according to the time which RTC404 shows, it is selected from five replacement update effects of theatrical effects “A-3” to “A-7”. Here, as shown in (1) of FIG. 67, the replacement renewal effect selected at this time (that is, theatrical effect of category A) is an effect of 60 seconds in total length, and the last two seconds are different for losing It is an effect that has two versions for hit. Then, according to which of the hit / loss is to be notified, the selected theater reach effect is performed from the beginning to the end (in the full version) of this effect of 60 seconds in total length. That is, the full version of the theater production is used as the selected theater reach production. On the other hand, the partial theater reach effect is, as described above, an effect in which a part of any of the above-mentioned five replacement renewal effects is performed, and when the phase of category A is updated to 7, the theater Among the five replacement update effects of the effects “A-3” to “A-7”, for example, a part of “A-4” determined by lottery is executed. More specifically, the partial theater reach production is from halfway (30 seconds after the start) to the end of the full 60 seconds of the theater production (replacement renewal production) according to which of hit / loss is to be reported. Run (in short version). That is, a short version of theater production is used as a partial theater reach production. In addition, as shown to (2) of FIG. 67, when the type of the production pattern of SP reach production of fluctuation time 40 seconds is determined, partial theater reach production is performed for 30 seconds after 10 seconds from a fluctuation start. The selected theater reach effect is, as shown in (3) of FIG. 67, 30 seconds after the start of the change when the type of the effect pattern of the fourth SPSP reach effect with a change time of 90 seconds is determined. It is a 60-second reach effect to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an outline of the partial theater reach presentation and the selected theater reach presentation will be described. When the partial theater reach effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started in the image display unit 6, as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2A), the reach eye (for example, "2") is established at a predetermined timing (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, as shown in (4A) of FIG. 68, partial theater reach production is started as a subsequent production developed on the occasion of reach eye formation, for example, the theater production "A-4" is a short version of the replacement update production. (From the remaining 30 seconds in the total length of 60 seconds) and then, as shown in (5A) in FIG. 68, the short version of the theater production is finished and the hit result (big hit / lost) is notified (For example, in the case of a big hit, an effect in which the character is determined to be “o” is displayed, in the case of a loss, an effect in which the character is determined to be “x” is displayed).

  On the other hand, when the selected play reach effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started in the image display unit 6, as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2B) of FIG. 68, a chance (for example, “1”, “2”, “3”) is established at a predetermined timing (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, an introduction effect for announcing that the reach selection screen is displayed is executed when the chance eye is realized, and the decorative symbol DI displayed temporarily at the chance eye is re-varied, and the upper left of the image display unit 6 It is switched and displayed on a reach eye (for example, "1") in the state reduced and displayed at the corner. Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 68, the reach selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6 and displayed as a reach effect from among the replacement update effects (for example, “A-3” to “A-7”) The player is prompted to select an effect to be played within the effective period. Then, the player selects the replacement update effect displayed on the reach selection screen using, for example, the up and down keys of the effect key 38, and presses the effect button 37 (determination operation) to select the selected replacement update effect. Decide as a reach effect. Specifically, when the up and down keys of the effect key 38 are operated, the cursor on the reach selection screen moves, and it is shown that the replacement update effect with the cursor overlapped is the effect currently selected, and the effect button As a result of the determination operation by 37, the exchange update effect with the cursor overlapping is determined as the reach effect. In addition, when there is no determination operation and the effective period has elapsed, the replacement update effect overlapping the cursor may be determined as the reach effect at the time when the effective period has elapsed, or the replacement selected by random lottery The update effect may be determined as the reach effect, or a predetermined replacement update effect (for example, the latest updated update effect) may be determined as the reach effect. In this manner, when the player selects any replacement update effect as the reach effect, the replacement update effect is started as the selected play reach effect, and specifically, for example, the play effect “A − 4 ”is started in the full version (from the remaining 60 seconds in the total length of 60 seconds), and then, as shown in (5B) of FIG. Lost) is reported. In the above, although the establishment of the chance eye is made a condition as an example of the occasion when the selected theater reach effect is executed (or the reach selection screen is displayed), the establishment of the chance eye is not necessarily the execution of the selected theater reach effect It does not guarantee (or the display of the reach selection screen). For example, even if a chance is established, only a part of the introduction effect for announcing that the reach selection screen is displayed is executed, and the decorative symbol DI is displayed as a main stop with the chance and a loss is notified. It may be performed.

  By the way, since the theater effect of category A is specified as replacement update effect, and the theater effect of categories A to D is specified as additional update effect, the theater effect of category A is as replacement update effect and additional update effect. It is identified. On the other hand, as described above, the additional update effect is executed as a selection effect selected by the player during the big hit round or selected by the player in the probability change gaming state, and is not interlocked with the change effect, so the big hit / It is not used to report loss. For this reason, when the theater effect of category A is used as the additional update effect, the lost version is used out of the two versions (hits / losses) described above. In addition, even when the theater effect of category A is specified as a replacement renewal effect and used as an exclusive effect after a sudden occurrence, it is not linked with the fluctuation effect (because, in more detail, the effect is replaced when a big hit), Of the two versions (hits / losses), the lost version is used. Therefore, the hit version of the theater effect of category A is used only when it is used as a reach effect (selected play reach effect or partial play reach effect) in the case of a big hit.

  As described above, in this embodiment, although the same theater effect is produced, the reach effect of different performance measures can be achieved by making the portions used different between the whole from the beginning to the end and the portions from the middle to the end. (It can be used for any of (a selected play reach effect with a production scale of 60 seconds and a partial play reach production with a production scale of 30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored in the ROM 502 as effect material. Also, in general, when preparing one theater production as staging material, the climax of the theater production is often set in the second half of the performance scale, so partial theaters where the part from the middle to the end of the theater production is used The climax of theater production will be executed also in reach production. For this reason, it is possible to entertain the player in any of the selected theater reach production and the partial theater reach production.

  In the above, since the same theater production is different from the whole from the beginning to the end as the used part and from the middle to the end, in other words, the same theater production is divided into the first half and the second half It can be said that it is divided into two parts: a pattern using both the first half and the second half (selected theater reach effect) and a pattern using only the second half (partial play reach effect). However, the method of division of the same theater rendition is not limited to the method of dividing into two parts of the first half and the second half in this way, for example, the first part, the middle part, the last part It may be divided into three (final). In this case, when the final stage portion (final) is common as the end portion of the theater production, a pattern in which "foreign, medium, final" is used, a pattern in which "medium, final" is used, "final" is If the pattern to be used is considered and the middle part (middle) is made common as the end part of the theater production, a pattern may be considered in which "introduction, middle" and "middle" are used. In this way, as a pattern in which the end part of the theater production is shared, there are more cases than dividing the theater production into two parts, the first half and the second half (the two patterns of the first half, the second half, and the second half). It is possible to realize the effect of the pattern of. In addition, since the middle part (middle) is provided by dividing the same theater rendition into three, the rendition ends with "middle" even when the rendition is started from "middle" (that is, when not started from "introductory") It is possible for the player to feel a sense of expectation that the game will develop in the end rather than in doing so.

[Development judgment presentation (short special production / full special production) summary]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, an outline of the development determination effect (short special effect and full special effect) will be described. The development judgment effect is realized mainly by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  First, a short special effect and a development judgment effect used as a full special effect will be described. As shown in (1) of FIG. 69, the development judgment effect is an effect with a total length of 80 seconds used in a short time gaming state after a one-time big hit, and the last two seconds have two different versions for lost and different It is an effect to have. Then, the full special rendition is executed from the beginning to the end (in the full version) according to which of the hit / loss is to be notified. That is, the development judgment effect of the full version is used as the full special effect. On the other hand, a short special rendition is a part of this development judgment rendition of 80 seconds in total length. More specifically, the short special rendition is executed (in the short version) from the beginning to the middle (at the time of 30 seconds after the start) of the development judgment rendition of the total length of 80 seconds. That is, the development judgment effect of the short version is used as the short special effect. In addition, as shown in (2) of FIG. 69, when the type of the effect pattern of the SP reach effect with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is determined, the short special effect is performed for 30 seconds after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. It is a reach effect, and the full special reach effect is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation when the type of the effect pattern of the fourth SPSP reach effect with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is determined as shown in (3) of FIG. 69. It is an 80-second reach production to be done. And at the development judgment informing timing (for example, after 38 seconds from the start of fluctuation) before the end of the short special rendition, the informing remark (in other words, the rendition of informing the crash result depending on which of hit / loss is notified). It can be replaced with (or overwritten) the notification effect of notifying that it is not continued. In addition, also in the full special effect, at the same development judgment notification timing (for example, 38 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the continuous notification effect for notifying that the effect is continued is displayed over the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) . That is, in both of the short special rendition and the full special rendition, the same development determination informing timing is provided, and at this development determination informing timing, whether the rendition is not continued (that is, is it a short special rendition), It is informed whether there is any (that is, is it a full special effect).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an overview of short special effects and full special effects will be described. When the short special rendition and the full special rendition are executed, in any case, when the variation of the special symbol is started, as shown in (1) of FIG. Fluctuating display is started, and a reach eye (for example, "2") is established at a predetermined timing (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) as shown in (2) of FIG. Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 70, a development judgment effect (short special effect or full special effect) is started as a subsequent effect that is triggered by the establishment of reach eye, and for example, the character straddling a motorcycle is the final An effect of traveling toward the ground is performed. Then, as shown in (4) of FIG. 70, whether or not the development judgment effect is developed in the second half part at the development judgment informing timing (for example, when 38 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation and the presentation button 37 is pressed) Notification of the determination result of is performed. For example, if it is determined that a character straddling a motorcycle can break through the wall and the wall can be broken at the timing at which the production button 37 is operated, it develops into the second half, and if it can not break through the wall, it expands into the second half do not do. Therefore, when the short special rendition is being executed, as shown in (5A) of FIG. 70, the development judgment rendition is ended without breaking through the wall (that is, for example, the hit notification rendition of “lost” is replaced) When the full special rendition is being executed, as shown in (5B) of FIG. 70, the development rendition continues by breaking through the wall. Note that, as described above, the above-mentioned development determination notification timing is the timing when the player operates the production button 37 within the predetermined button operation valid period, or the presentation button 37 by the player within the operation valid period. It is assumed that it is the timing when the operation effective period has expired when the operation of is not performed, but it may be a timing defined in advance instead of the timing according to such button operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach of different performance measures is obtained by making the portions used different between the first part to the last part and the first part to the middle part, although they are the same development judgment effect. It can be used for any of the effects (a full special effect with a production scale of 80 seconds and a short special effect with a production scale of 30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored in the ROM 502 as effect material. In addition, since both short special rendition and full special rendition are started from the beginning of the development judgment effect, at the time these renditions are started, which rendition is being executed (that is, the rendition is to the end) I do not know whether it is a full special production to continue or a short special production that the production ends on the way). In addition, since full special effects are used as the fourth SPSP reach effects and short special effects are used as SP reach effects, when full special effects are executed, a big hit is produced than when short special effects are performed. Highly reliable. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration by expecting the player that the full special effect is being executed (that is, the effect is continued) at the progress determination notification timing.

  In the above, the same development judgment rendition is made to differ from the first to the last and the first to the middle as the part used, in other words, the same development judgment rendition is the first half It can be said that the pattern is divided into two parts, the second half and the second half, and a pattern using both the first half and the second half (full special rendering) and a pattern using only the first half (short special rendering). However, the method of division of the same development judgment effect is not limited to the method of dividing into two parts of the first half and the second half in this way, for example, the first part (early part), the middle part (middle), the last part It may be divided into three parts (final). In this case, when the beginning part (order) is made common as the start part of the development judgment rendition, the pattern in which "order, middle, end" is used, the pattern in which "order, middle" is used, "order" If the middle part (middle) is common as the start part of the development judgment effect, a pattern in which “middle, final” and “middle” are used is considered. In this way, as a pattern in which the start portion of the development determination effect is common, the development determination effect is divided into two parts, the first half and the second half (two patterns of “first half, second half”, and “first half”) More pattern effects can be realized. In addition, since it has a middle part (middle) by dividing the same development judgment effect into three, not only the pattern in which only "Introduction" is executed, but also "middle" is executed as an example of the effect that does not progress to "end" The pattern to be played can also be executed, and the player can be expected to develop or not at multiple stages.

[Simulation series production summary]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, an outline of the pseudo connected effect will be described. The pseudo connected effect is mainly realized by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 71, the number of times of re-variation display (the number of times of pseudo run) in the simulated production effect will be described. For example, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, the pseudo-series effect is executed as a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time is about 15 seconds (pseudo 1 / loss), a fluctuation time is about 40 seconds ( It is when the fluctuation pattern of pseudo 2 per 2) and the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time of about 90 seconds (ps 3 per pseudo / loss) are determined. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, even if such a variation pattern is determined, the pseudo-sequence effect of the pseudo-sequence number different from the pseudo-sequence number specified by the variation pattern is executed according to the sub lottery table. obtain.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 71, when the fluctuation pattern of per-pseudo 1 / losing is determined, as described above, the effect control unit 400 selects the sub lottery table 1 (see (1) of FIG. 39). Since the effect content is determined with reference to as shown in (A1) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run effect of one pseudo run number of times in which the pseudo run symbol temporarily stops once 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation is executed If there is also, as shown in (A2) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run effect of 2 pseudo run numbers of times in which the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped twice is executed 5 seconds and 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Sometimes. It should be noted that when the fluctuation pattern of this pseudo 1 per / loss is determined, since the fluctuation time is as short as about 15 seconds, the result of the drop after the reach eye is established after that, even if any pseudo continuous effect is executed Is notified and the pseudo connected effect ends. In addition, as shown in (A1), in the case where one pseudo-series effect is executed, the timing at which the reach is established is the timing at which the second pseudo-series symbol shown in (A2) temporarily stops. Overlapping is preferred. By doing this, the player can not know whether the reach eye is established (that is, the simulated serial effect ends) or the pseudo linked pattern is temporarily stopped again (that is, the simulated serial effect continues). It can give a sense of exhilaration.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 71, when the variation pattern of per-secondary / losing is determined, as described above, the effect control unit 400 selects the sub lottery table 2 (see (2) of FIG. 39). Since the effect content is determined with reference to, as shown in (B1) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run effect of one pseudo run number of times in which the pseudo run symbol temporarily stops once 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation is executed If there is also, as shown in (B2) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run effect is performed twice the number of times of pseudo run where the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped twice 10 seconds and 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation If there is a case, as shown in (B3) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run effect of the pseudo run number of times of 3 times where the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped 3 times temporarily after 10 seconds, 15 seconds and 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation. It may be executed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of this false 2 per / loss is determined, the fluctuation time is about 40 seconds, so even if any simulated series effect is executed, the reach eye is established thereafter as an opportunity Developed to follow the development direction. In addition, as shown in (B1), in the case where one pseudo-series effect is executed, the timing at which the reach is established is the timing at which the second pseudo-series symbol shown in (B3) temporarily stops. Overlapping is preferred. By doing this, the player can not know whether the reach eye is established (that is, the simulated serial effect ends) or the pseudo linked pattern is temporarily stopped again (that is, the simulated serial effect continues). It can give a sense of exhilaration.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 71, when the fluctuation pattern of per false 3 / loss is determined, as described above, the effect control unit 400 selects the sub lottery table 3 (see (3) of FIG. 39). Since the content of the effect is determined with reference to, as shown in (C2) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run pattern is temporarily stopped twice twice at 10 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. If an effect is executed, as shown in (C3) in FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo run pattern is temporarily stopped 3 times, and the pseudo run pattern is temporarily stopped 3 times after 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. There are also cases where a pseudo rendition of is performed. It should be noted that when the fluctuation pattern of this pseudo 3 per / loss is determined, the fluctuation time is about 90 seconds, so even if any pseudo-rectification effect is executed, it is triggered that the reach eye is established thereafter. Developed to follow the development direction. In addition, as shown in (C3), when the simulated consecutive rendering is performed three times, the timing at which the second simulated connected symbol temporarily stops is the second simulated connected symbol shown in (B2). It is preferable to overlap with the timing of temporary stop. By doing this, whether the 40 seconds of the fluctuation effect that the reach eye is established is executed (that is, the pseudo continuous effect ends), or the 90 seconds of the floating effect that the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops again The player can be given a sense of excitement because he does not know whether it is being executed (that is, whether the pseudo-series effect continues).

  In addition, the temporary stop timing of the pseudo run symbol mentioned above and the timing when the reach eye is realized are only one example, and if the pseudo run effect of different number of times can be executed for the same fluctuation pattern, the stop of the pseudo run symbol The timing at which the timing or reach is established is not limited to this.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an outline of the pseudo series effect will be described. In the case where the simulated serial effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started in the image display unit 6 as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2), the pseudo run symbol (for example, "7") is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, thereafter, as shown in (3) of FIG. 72, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol DI is further resumed, and as shown in (2) of FIG. The pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped again, or a reach eye (for example, "4") is established as shown in (4) of FIG. Incidentally, the effects shown in (2) and (3) of FIG. 72 are repeated according to the set number of pseudo-sequences. Then, when the reach eye is established, when the fluctuation pattern of pseudo 1 per / fluctuation of 15 seconds of fluctuation time is selected thereafter, as shown in (5A) of FIG. For example, the pseudo-sequence effect is ended by stopping the lost eye, and the fluctuation pattern of 40 seconds with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is selected, or the fluctuation pattern of 90 seconds with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is changed. If a pattern is selected, as shown at (5B) in FIG. In the above, an example in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed (the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed as a temporary stop) has been described, but in addition to this, the decorative symbol (the symbol in the center) which is temporarily displayed as a temporary stop is a pseudo continuous In order to be displayed as a temporary stop with a symbol, an effect (so-called pseudo continuous effect) may be executed in which the user is informed of a lose without being displayed as a temporary continuous symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 400 determines the effect contents with reference to the sub lottery tables 1, 2, 3 (see FIG. 39) even if there is one variation pattern relating to the pseudo connected effect. Therefore, since effects of a plurality of pseudo-sequences can be executed, various effects can be realized. Specifically, even if the fluctuation pattern with one pseudo-training number is determined, the pseudo-training effect with one or two pseudo-trainings can be performed, and the fluctuation pattern with two pseudo-training numbers is determined. Even if the number of pseudo-sequences can be executed any pseudo-sequence effect of 1 to 3 times, even if the variation pattern of 3 times of pseudo-sequences is determined, the number of pseudo-sequences is 2 or 3 Is feasible. In addition, as described above, when the period during which the pseudo-series effect of a specific pseudo-sequence number (for example, pseudo 3) is not executed becomes long, the pseudo-sequence effect of the pseudo-sequence number can be easily performed. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the execution frequency of the pseudo-series effect of the number of series.

[Outline of special effects after a crash]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, an outline of the special effects after impact (and the effect after the impact change) will be described. In addition, the special effects after a collision are realized mainly by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 51, and FIG. In addition, as described above, the special effects after a crash are selected from among the replacement and update effects, and are full-length 60-second theater effects (more specifically, the lost version of category A theater effects).

  First, referring to (1) in FIG. 73, in the 30 short time gaming state (see FIG. 6) after the big hit (big hit C), the suspension of the special symbol lottery is not interrupted (that is, the wait state) The special effects after the collision in the case where all the special symbol lottery results are lost will be described. In this short time game state after the big hit at the time of the hit, as described above with reference to FIG. 23, when the number of rotations in the short time game state is "one time", the variation time of the special symbol in the case of "lost" Is “9.5 seconds” and the determination time is “0.5 seconds”, so the total time for the stop symbol to be determined and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol lottery of the first rotation is “ It will be 10.0 seconds. On the other hand, when the number of rotations in the time saving game state is "2 to 30", the variation time of the special symbol in the case of "loss" is "1.5 seconds", and the determination time is "0.5 seconds" Therefore, after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery, the entire time when the stop symbol is determined and stopped is "2.0 seconds". For this reason, without suspension of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is changed and displayed 30 times, and when the determined time elapses (10.0 seconds + 2.0 seconds x 29 times =) "68 seconds" elapses. On the other hand, special effects after drama (theatrical effects) are not linked to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, but after the first time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, it is for selecting the special effects after the collision It starts with the passage of a specified time (8.0 seconds; selection time), and since the effect is a total effect of 60 seconds, the variation display of the 30th special symbol is finished, and it is finished when the decision time passes. In other words, the special effects after the impact will be just finished in the 30 short time gaming state, so that the special effects after the impact can be made to function as the special effects during the short time gaming state after the big hit it can. In this way, in order to match the execution time of the special effect after collision at the same time with the sum of the variation time of the special symbol of 30 times and the determination time, the special effect after collision does not change the special symbol, so-called It also progresses (is executed) at the determined time. In addition, although the variation time of the special symbol in the first rotation is 9.5 seconds, of these, the variation time for which dedicated rendering is performed after a crash is 1.5 seconds excluding the first 8.0 seconds. If there is a loss in the 30 short time game state, only after 2.0 seconds (= fluctuating time 1.5 seconds + settling time 0.5 seconds) at any speed, there is a dedicated effect after the collision. It will progress.

  Next, referring to (2) of FIG. 73, the suspension of the special symbol lottery may be interrupted in 30 short time gaming states (see FIG. 6) after the big hit (big hit C) at the time of the sudden hit (that is, the customer The special effects after the collision in the case where the results of all the special symbol lottery are lost will be described. In this case, when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is interrupted (that is, when waiting for a customer), the progress of the dedicated effect is suspended after the collision. Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 73, for example, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed twice, when the customer waiting state is established, the progress of the exclusive effect after the collision is “two times”. × Pause while progressing for "2.0 seconds" = "4.0 seconds". After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is resumed, the progress of the dedicated effect is resumed after the collision from the paused state again (that is, the progress is resumed from the progressed state for only 4.0 seconds). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery suspension is suspended, the dedicated effect after a total impact of 60 seconds is temporarily stopped from proceeding with the effect, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed, Resume the progression of the production. For this reason, the variable display of the special symbol is executed once, and the effect of 2 seconds will be advanced each time the settling time elapses, and even if the suspension of the special symbol lottery is interrupted, the 30th of the special symbol The variable display ends, and the determination time ends and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to (3) and (4) in FIG. 73, in the case of 30 short time gaming states (see FIG. 6) after the big hit (big hit C), the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. I will explain the special effects after the crash in. In addition, (3) in FIG. 73 shows a case where a big hit is made with a small number of rotations (for example, the second rotation) in the short time gaming state, and (4) in FIG. It shows about the case of making a big hit with.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 73, when making a big hit in the second rotation (“2 to 6 times”) in the short time gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. 23, the variation time of the special symbol is Since it is "60 seconds" (per first measure) and the determination time is "0.5 seconds", the total time for the stop symbol to be determined and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery It will be "60.5 seconds". For this reason, when the variation display of the special symbol of the second rotation in the short time game state ends and the determined time elapses, the variation display of the first special symbol starts and the selection time elapses, “2.0 seconds + "60.5 seconds" = "62.5 seconds" have passed. On the other hand, the special effects after collision are not interlocked with the change display of the special symbol, but the change display of the first special symbol is started and started as the selection time elapses, with a total effect of 60 seconds in total Because of this, it is possible to advance the effect to the end by the end of the variation display of the special symbol of the second rotation and the elapse of the determined time. In this case, for the special effects after the "60 seconds" collision, until after the selection time has passed and the second symbol's variation display of the special symbol is finished and the determination time passes, "62 It has a time of .5 seconds, but immediately before the end of the exclusive effect after the crash (for example from 1 second) it is replaced by the exclusive effect after the impact and the big hit notification effect is executed, and the big hit notification effect is By continuing for 1 second + remaining 2.5 seconds, the remaining presentation time is absorbed. In addition, for example, when the number of rotations is "2 to 6 times", all have the same fluctuation pattern (variation time 60 seconds), but when the big hit is made at the sixth rotation, the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the first rotation "5 times" x "2.0 seconds" + "60.5 seconds" until the variation display of the special symbol of the 6th rotation is finished and selection time passes after the selection time has been started. = 70.5 seconds have passed. In this case, by continuing the jackpot notification effect (replacement second + remaining 10.5 seconds), the remaining presentation time is digested. As described above, in the range of the rotation number assigned to the same fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 23, the remaining effect time is digested by lengthening the execution time of the big hit notification effect as the rotation number increases.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), when making a big hit on the 26th rotation ("25 to 30 times") in the short time gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol Since the fluctuation time is "12 seconds" (per 5th scale) and the determination time is "0.5 seconds", the stop symbol is fixedly stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery. Time is "12.5 seconds". For this reason, when the variation display of the special symbol at the 26th rotation in the short time game state ends and the determined time elapses, the first time the variation display of the special symbol starts and the selection time passes, "25 times" X "2.0 seconds" + "12.5 seconds" = "62.5 seconds" have passed. On the other hand, the special effects after collision are not interlocked with the change display of the special symbol, but the change display of the first special symbol is started and started as the selection time elapses, with a total effect of 60 seconds in total Because of this, it is possible to advance the effect to the end by the end of the variation display of the special symbol at the 26th rotation and the determination time elapses. Incidentally, as described with reference to (3) of FIG. 73, also in this case, it is replaced by a special effect after a collision (for example, from 1 second before) immediately before the exclusive effect ends after a collision and a big hit notification The effect is executed, and the big hit notification effect is continued (replacement second + remaining 2.5 seconds), whereby the remaining effect time is absorbed. Similarly, in the range of rotation numbers assigned to the same fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 23, the remaining presentation time is absorbed by increasing the execution time of the big hit notification effect as the rotation number increases. .

  As can be seen from (3) and (4) in FIG. 73, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit in 30 short time gaming states after a big hit (big hit C), it is when the big hit As the rotational speed of the motor increases, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. In each fluctuation pattern (variation time) shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation display of the first rotation is started and the selection time elapses, and then the fluctuation display of the big hit rotation number is ended and the confirmation time is elapsed. Sixty seconds are configured to elapse (see FIG. 23). For this reason, it becomes possible to secure the time to execute the exclusive effect after the 60 seconds of the crash, and also the big hit notification effect for adjustment, regardless of the number of rotations in the short time gaming state after the big hit at the time of the crash. It is sufficient to execute at maximum (1 second replaced + 10.5 seconds remaining), and a natural rendering can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, an outline of a dedicated effect after a collision is described. When an exclusive effect is executed after a crash, first, as shown in (1) of FIG. 74, in the first rotation in the short time gaming state after the impact big hit, the total length 60 seconds as an effect after the impact only A selection screen for selecting one of the replacement update effects (for example, “A-3” to “A-7” when the phase of the category A is 7) is displayed for a prescribed time (8.0 seconds). Then, the player selects a replacement update effect to be executed as an exclusive effect after a collision in a specified time (selection time; 8.0 seconds) in which the selection screen is displayed. Then, a special effect after a collision selected by the player (or a predetermined special effect after a collision if not selected by the player) is started with the passage of a prescribed selection time. Therefore, as shown in (2) of FIG. 74, at the time when the second rotation in the short time gaming state after the jackpot hit is started, the special effect after collision is the fluctuation time of the loss of the first rotation (9. The rendering is in progress for 2 seconds which is the sum of the variation time (1.5 seconds) excluding the selection time (8.0 seconds) from the 5 seconds) and the determination time (0.5 seconds) The time is 58 seconds). Then, for example, when the variation display of the second rotation is finished and the determination time has elapsed, when the waiting for a customer is made, as shown in (3) of FIG. , The remaining time of the production pauses at 56 seconds)). After that, when the variation display of the special symbol is resumed, as shown in (4) of FIG. 74, the progress of the dedicated effect is resumed after the collision (that is, the remaining time of the effect is resumed from 56 seconds). ). And, when it does not make a big hit in the time reduction gaming state of 30 revolutions, as shown in (5A) of FIG. 74, the loss notification effect (the effect of theatrical effect is indicated as “x” in the variable display of the special symbol of 30 revolutions The effect to be determined is executed, the variation display is ended, and the decided time elapses, and the special effect after the collision is ended (that is, the remaining time of the effect becomes 0 seconds). On the other hand, for example, when a big hit is made at the 26th rotation, as shown in (5B) of FIG. 74, the special effects proceed after the collision even in the case of the fluctuation, and then, as shown in (6) of FIG. The jackpot notification effect (effect that determines the effect of the play effect as “o”) is replaced and executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, a judgment effect (determination that indicates whether a big hit or a loss is made) is performed by using the variable display of the 30th rotation to determine the effect of the play effect as “o” or “x”. However, regardless of which of the judgment effects is made, the special effects after the impact continue to be reproduced with the same contents of theatrical effects. Further, during the big hit variation display shown in (5B) of FIG. 74, the decorative symbol DI displayed in the reduced size at the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 is falsely stopped every 2.0 seconds as a post-hit variation effect. By making it appear as if the variable display of the special symbol of several losses is executed, it is possible to make it appear as if the fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation (that is, for example, it is not a fluctuation time of 12 seconds) It becomes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special effects after collision are continuously executed even in the determined time in which the special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is not interrupted, it is continued without interrupting the special effects after the collision even in the determined time between the variation time of the special symbol and the variation time of the next special symbol. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is interrupted, the special effects for the special effects after the collision are temporarily paused in the progress of the effects, and the progress of the effects is resumed when the fluctuation display of the special symbols is resumed. . For this reason, the special effects after a collision will be advanced each time the special symbol is changed, and some of the effects will not be missed and not executed. For this reason, it is possible to use, as an exclusive effect after a collision, a story effect or the like which is not suitable when interrupted.

[Summary of selection effects in the probability variation gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, an outline of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. This selection effect is mainly realized by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 51, and FIG. In addition, when the selection effect is executed during the round in the big hit game, since the selection effect executed at this time is set in the RAM 503, as the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state, this selection effect is It is taken over and executed.

  First, with reference to (1) in FIG. 75, the selection effect when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is not interrupted in the probability variation gaming state (that is, it will not be in the customer waiting state) will be described. In this probability variation gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. 24, the variation time of the special symbol in the case of "losing" is "0.5 seconds", and the variation time of the special symbol in the case of "hit" Is “4.5 seconds” and the determination time is “0.5 seconds” respectively, so the entire time for the stop symbol to be determined and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery is the loss of In the case of "1.0 seconds", in the case of the hit "5.0 seconds". For this reason, when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is not interrupted, the special symbol lottery will be digested at high speed. On the other hand, the selection effect is continuously performed during the time during which the special symbol is variably displayed and the time when it is decided to be stopped without being interlocked with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the selection effect is an effect selected from among the additional update effects, and the additional update effects each have a fixed effect scale (60 seconds), but when one additional update effect is finished, The next additional update effect is automatically selected and executed in accordance with the selection mode (for example, the in-category sequential selection mode). For this reason, the selection effect is continuously performed, and is terminated when the big hit effect is started, for example, when the big hit occurs at the 60th rotation. In addition, when the said big hit is big hit D, since selection production is performed as a normal round production in a big hit, the selection production currently performed at this time is continuously performed.

  By the way, as described above, the special symbol lottery is digested at high speed, because it is controlled in a short time (power support) state until the next time in the probability change gaming state, it is practically possible to hit the next big hit Therefore, the game does not focus on notification effects (varying effects) to notify that it is a big hit or not, and the game is played by a selected effect that is executed without being interlocked with the fluctuating effects. Focuses on entertaining people. Note that this selection effect can be executed from among the additional update effects, and since the additional update effect includes the exchange update effect (see FIG. 32), it is also possible to execute the exchange update effect as the selection effect. However, unlike the case where the replacement renewal effect is executed as an exclusive effect after a collision (refer to FIG. 74) when the replacement renewal effect is executed as the selected effect (“O” or “x”). The judgment effect of judging “determination effect” (effect to notify whether a big hit or a loss; see (5A) or (6) in FIG. 74) is not executed.

  Next, with reference to (2) in FIG. 75, the selection effect when the suspension of the special symbol lottery is interrupted in the probability variation gaming state (that is, the wait for a customer) will be described. In this case, the selection effect is continuously executed even in the customer waiting state. However, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after entering the customer waiting state, the volume level of the effect sound of the selected effect is changed (for example, reduced). Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is resumed, the volume level is returned to the original volume level again, and the selection effect is executed. That is, during 30 seconds after entering the customer wait state, until the variable display of the special symbol is started next, the selection effect is continuously executed but the volume level is changed. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. When this selection effect is executed, as shown in (1) of FIG. 74, in the probability change gaming state, any play effect set from among the additional update effects as the selection effect (for example, “A − 4) is executed, and at this time, the decorative symbol DI is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 as a variable effect during variation. When this selection effect is executed, as shown in (2) of FIG. 74, the player operates the effect key 38 or the like in the same manner as the selection effect during the big hit, so that the image display unit 6 is performed. It is possible to display the effect selection screen on the right side of the, and it is possible to switch the category of the selected effect or to transitionally display the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor. Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is finished, the decoration symbol DI that is being displayed in the variation at the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, when there is no suspension of the special symbol lottery (that is, waiting for customers In the state, as shown in (3) of FIG. 74, the decorative symbol DI remains stopped and displayed, but the selection effect is continued even in the customer waiting state. Then, as shown in (4) of FIG. 74, the volume level of the selected effect is changed from the volume level (for example, level 7) which has been executed so far, for example, 30 seconds after the customer waiting state. Volume level is reduced to 1. Then, as shown in (5) of FIG. 74, when the variation display of the special symbol is resumed, the volume level is returned to the original volume level (level 7) again, and the selection effect is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the selection effect is not interlocked with the variation of the special symbol (that is, not interlocked with the determination of the big hit / loss). It is possible to focus on the selected effect. Further, in the present embodiment, when the 60 seconds of the theater effect is finished, the next theater effect is automatically started according to the selection mode, and the selection effect is continuously executed. Even in the case where the non-big hit time is long (in the case of a so-called hard hit), by making the player enjoy the selection effect, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discouragement due to non-big hit. The selection effect is not limited to one in which 60 seconds of theatrical effect is continuously performed as described above, but a longer (for example, five minutes) effect may be performed. In this case, for example, as the special symbol lottery loses, the selection effect is executed for a longer time. Therefore, for the player, the selection effect is lengthened separately from the interest of whether or not it is a big hit. It is possible to evoke an interest in wanting to see (eg, want to see the effect until the end in the probability variation gaming state). In addition, since this selection effect is continuously executed even in the customer waiting state, for example, a player who wants to change the mood by not making a big hit at all stops the launch of the game ball and selects in the customer waiting state You can also enjoy the production. On the other hand, the volume of the selected effect is changed (for example, reduced) when a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from the customer waiting state, as in the case where the player leaves the seat in the probability variation gaming state, for example. ). For this reason, it is prevented that an ineffective effect is executed even when there is no player, and by continuing the selection effect as the effect image, the current gaming state of the gaming machine is a special gaming state It is also possible to notify that (that is, it is a probability variation gaming state). Further, this selection effect can be executed from among the additional update effects, and since the additional update effect includes the exchange update effect (see FIG. 32), it is also possible to execute the exchange update effect as the selection effect. And, as described above, since the replacement renewal effect is also used as a reach effect (a partial play reach effect or a selected play reach effect), it is possible that the reach effect can be executed as a selection effect. By the way, whether partial theater reach production or selected theater reach production is executed as a reach production is determined based on a lottery, and therefore, even if partial theater reach production or selected theater reach production does not appear is there. However, since it is possible to execute these reach effects as selection effects in this way, the player can select and enjoy effects that could not be viewed as reach effects. In the above embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the selection effect not linked to the variation of the special symbol is executed, but it may be executed not in the probability variation gaming state but, for example, in the time saving gaming status . Even in this case, in the gaming machine having a large number of time-savings, since there may be no big hit at all, the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, among the theater effects stored in the ROM 502, the exchange update effect and the addition are performed by the two different update methods of the exchange update and the additional update. The update presentation is specified. That is, in the replacement update presentation, only five drama presentations are specified in the order of the latest update, while in the additional update presentation, all the theater presentation updated so far are specified. That is, while only 5 theater effects are specified as replacement effects even after time passes, the number of theater effects specified as additional update effects increases as time passes. And, since the way of being used as a game effect is different in the replacement update effect and the additional update effect, various effects can be realized. Specifically, while the replacement renewal effect is used as an exclusive effect after reaching the emergency, as a reach effect (selected play reach effect, partial play reach effect), the additional update effect is selected during the big hit round and the probability variation gaming state It is used as an effect. That is, while the replacement update effect is used only when a dedicated effect or reach effect is executed after a collision by the effect lottery, the additional update effect is used by the player regardless of the effect lottery. It is time to choose freely. Therefore, even if the theater effect specified as the replacement update effect is not executed, the replacement update effect is included in the play effect specified as the additional update effect in the jackpot during or after the big hit by the big hit As a result, the player can see the theater rendition that has not been performed. On the other hand, since only the five theater effects updated to the latest are specified as the replacement renewal effect, for example, the old theater effect is not executed as the reach effect. And, since this replacement renewal effect is updated to a new one over time, the latest theater effect is always executed as the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to continuously attract the player's interest, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the second RTC effect is not executed in a specific gaming state (that is, a time saving gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, and a big hit gaming state). However, the condition that the second RTC effect is not executed may not be determined depending on the gaming state. For example, the second RTC effect may not be executed when the effect of the predetermined effect mode is executed in the image display unit 6 even in the same normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, although the second RTC effect is not executed in a specific gaming state, it may not be completely executed but its execution may be limited. In addition, when execution is restricted, its execution should be relatively restricted compared with other production, for example, when other production is displayed on the full screen in the image display part 6, The present invention may be executed on a display unit (sub display unit) smaller than the image display unit 6, or may be output with a smaller effect sound than that of other effects.

  Further, in the above embodiment, for example, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the simultaneous game effect is displayed semi-transparently, so that the visibility of the highly reliable SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is It shall be secured. However, the method of securing the visibility of the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect that are already being executed is not limited to the method of displaying the simultaneous game effect semi-transparently. More specifically, the simultaneous game effect may be displayed in a mode lower than the visibility of the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect already being executed, and may be displayed intermittently at predetermined intervals, for example. It may be displayed in a display area (sub screen) smaller than the image display unit 6.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100, the demonstration control unit 400 refers to the sub lottery table to determine the content of the presentation, and the pseudo series is described as an example. . However, the example in which the effect control unit 400 determines the effect content with reference to the sub lottery table in this way is not limited to the pseudo continuous effect, but is another specific effect (for example, a specific reach effect with high reliability) It may be. Specifically, for example, even if the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 is not the type of effect pattern for executing the specific reach effect, the effect control unit 400 refers to the sub lottery table, and this specific reach The presentation may be possible. As the sub lottery table at this time, a table may be used in which the specific reach effect is more easily performed as the number of times the specific reach effect is not continued is increased. Also, the table to be referred to may not be changed according to the number of fluctuations that the specific reach effect is not continuously executed as described above, for example, the table to be referred to may be changed according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit. . In this case, for example, the specific reach effect may be more easily performed as the number of changes after the big hit is smaller. In this way, since a specific reach effect with high reliability can be easily executed after a big hit, it is easy to increase the player's expectation that the game may become a big hit again (so-called continuous running).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the V round effect is performed, the selection effect is temporarily stopped, but the execution of the selection effect during the big hit is thus restricted in the V round effect Is not limited to when it is executed. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a promotion effect (for example, an effect of making it appear that it is a big hit of 8R and reporting that it is actually a big hit of 16R) during a big hit game round, The selection effect may be paused. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect to be temporarily stopped when the V-round effect is executed is the selected effect selected by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a predetermined effect. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, theatrical production used as the reach production (selected theatrical play production, partial theatrical play production) is determined from among the replacement renewal effects, but is determined from the additional renewal effects. It is good also as things. Moreover, when specific conditions are satisfied (for example, when it is a specific fluctuation pattern or when it is a specific effect mode), it can be selected as reach effect from all the play effects stored in the ROM 502 It may be Further, although only the theater effect of category A is set as the replacement update effect, theater effects of a plurality of categories including other categories may be set.

  In the embodiment described above, the first large winning opening 23 is controlled to open and close in rounds other than the V round, and the second large winning opening 51 including the V region 53 is controlled to open and close in the V round, so-called double attacker However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the configuration of a single attacker having only the second large winning opening 51 may be employed. In this case, the second big winning opening is controlled to open and close in the rounds other than the V round, but the V area 53 is never opened, and the V area 53 is opened only in the V round. It should be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control unit 400 determines the effect pattern according to the notification effect start command, and determines the content of the effect by determining the contents and the like of various advance effects based on the effect pattern, A command for instructing the contents of the effect is transmitted to the image sound control unit 500, and the image sound control unit 500 sets the execution schedule such as the execution timing and execution time of various effects according to the command and executes the effect And However, the sharing of processing between the effect control unit 400 and the image sound control unit 500 is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 400 determines only the effect pattern according to the notification effect start command, and the image sound control The section 500 may determine various advance notice effects and the like based on the effect pattern transmitted from the effect control section 400, and may further determine these execution schedules to execute effects. In addition, when a single CPU is used as a CPU for performing display control, the same CPU may perform all the processes described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is won (big hit), a predetermined ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. The big hit is 75%), and the game configuration (a so-called loop machine) is set as a definite change gaming state until the next big hit on the condition of V prize (correctly until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 9999 times) Explained. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when winning a special symbol lottery (big hit), the variable display of the special symbol is thereafter given a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 150 times) at a ratio of 100%. The game configuration (so-called ST machine) may be set to the probability variation gaming state until it is executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be applied to, for example, slot machines (rolling-type gaming machines, pachislot machines) within the applicable range. In this case, when the lever is turned on while the medal is inserted into the slot machine, game information (random number; determination information) for determining a hit is obtained (that is, game information is obtained). Conditions to be satisfied). Further, in this case, the “informing effect” in each of the above-described embodiments corresponds to the effect from when the reel is moved by the on operation of the lever in the slot machine until when it is stopped.

  In addition, although the features of the present embodiment and the features of the modification thereof have been described above, it goes without saying that these features may be combined appropriately.

  In addition, the shapes, the numbers, the installation positions, and the like of the components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above are merely examples, and the scope of the present invention may be the other shapes, the numbers, and the installation positions. It goes without saying that the present invention can be realized without deviating from the above. Further, it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even if the numerical values and the like used in the above-described process are merely examples and other numerical values.

  While the present invention has been described in detail by way of embodiments, the foregoing description is only illustrative of the present invention in all points, and is not intended to limit the scope thereof. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, it is to be understood that the terms used in the present specification are used in the meanings commonly used in the art unless otherwise stated. Thus, unless otherwise defined, all technical and technical terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 2 ... Game board 4 ... Display 5 ... Frame member 6 ... Image display part 7 ... Movable object 8 ... Board lamp 20 ... Game area 21 ... 1st starting opening 22 ... 2nd starting opening 23 ... 1st Large winning opening 24 ... Normal winning opening 25 ... Gate 26 ... Discharge opening 27 ... Electric tulip 31 ... Handle 32 ... Lever 33 ... Stop button 34 ... Ejecting button 35 ... Speaker 36 ... Frame lamp 37 ... Effect button 38 ... Effect key 39 ... Dish 43: Locking part 50: Right hand 51: Second large winning opening 52: V hand 53: V area 6 w: Wipe area 100: Main control section 101, 201, 301, 401, 501, 601: CPU
102, 202, 302, 402, 502, 602 ... ROM
103, 203, 303, 403, 503, 603 ... RAM
111a ... 1st starting opening switch 111b ... 2nd starting opening switch 112 ... electric tulip opening and closing part 113 ... gate switch 114 ... first large winning opening switch 115 ... first large winning opening opening and closing part 116 ... ordinary winning opening switch 117 ... 1st opening 2 large winning opening switch 118 ... 2nd large winning opening opening and closing unit 119 ... V area switch 120 ... V area opening and closing unit 200 ... launch control unit 211 ... launch device 300 ... payout control unit 311 ... payout drive unit 400 ... effect control unit 404 ... RTC
500 ... image sound control unit 600 ... lamp control unit 700 ... power supply DI ... decoration pattern

Claims (1)

Special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game by establishment of the start condition;
Symbol display control means for controlling a variable display for stopping the determination symbol indicating the determination result after changing the symbol in the symbol display means based on the determination result by the special game determination means;
Special game execution means for performing the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be performed;
Game state control means capable of controlling the game in the normal game state and the advantageous game state more advantageous than the normal game state;
And effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect,
The effect control means is
When the variable display is performed by the symbol display control means in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute one of a plurality of specific effects and a partial effect that is a part of any of the specific effects,
When performing the specific effect is executed first effect time,
When the partial effect is performed, a second effect time that is shorter than the first effect time is executed ,
When being controlled in the advantageous gaming state, any of the plurality of specific effects can be executed for the first effect time according to the operation of the player on the operation means.
A gaming machine capable of continuously executing the specific effect even in a period in which the variable display in the advantageous gaming state is not performed .

Images